FILE NO. A08-007
SERVICE MANUAL
AIR-CONDITIONER
SPLIT TYPE
INDOOR UNIT
<DIGITAL INVERTER>
RAV-SM404SDT-E
RAV-SM454SDT-E
RAV-SM564SDT-E
OUTDOOR UNIT
<SUPER DIGITAL INVERTER>
RAV-SP404AT-E RAV-SP454AT-E
RAV-SP404ATZ-E RAV-SP454ATZ-E
RAV-SP404ATZG-E RAV-SP454ATZG-E
RAV-SP564AT-E RAV-SP804AT-E
RAV-SP564ATZ-E RAV-SP804ATZ-E
RAV-SP564ATZG-E RAV-SP804ATZG-E
R410A
PRINTED IN JAPAN, Jan., 2009 ToMo
7. REFRIGERANT R410A ............................................................................ 33
7-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing ............................................................... 33
7-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation....................................................................... 33
7-3. Tools .................................................................................................................. 37
7-4. Recharging of Refrigerant................................................................................ 37
7-5. Brazing of Pipes................................................................................................ 38
7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C ............................................ 40
8. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT (SLIM DUCTTYPE) ................................. 43
8-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram..................................................................... 43
8-2. Indoor Controls (Slim DuctType) .................................................................... 46
8-3. Optional Connector Specifications of Indoor P.C. Board .............................. 55
8-4. Indoor Print Circuit Board ................................................................................ 56
9. OUTDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT.............................................................. 57
9-1. Outdoor Controls .............................................................................................. 57
9-2. Outdoor Print Circuit Board ............................................................................. 68
10. TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................. 70
10-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting........................................................................... 70
10-2. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 72
11. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD.......................................... 107
11-1. Indoort Unit (Slim DuctType)......................................................................... 107
12. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS ................................................ 112
12-1. Indoor Unit (Slim DuctType) .......................................................................... 112
12-2. Setup at Local Site / Others ........................................................................... 119
12-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number ......................................... 121
12-4. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 126
13. ADDRESS SETUP.................................................................................. 134
13-1. Address Setup Procedure.............................................................................. 134
13-2. Address Setup & Group Control.................................................................... 135
13-3. Remote Controller Wiring............................................................................... 138
13-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)............................. 139
13-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position ..................................................... 140
14. DETACHMENTS ..................................................................................... 142
14-1. Indoor Unit...................................................................................................... 142
14-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 147
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST .................................................. 164
15-1. Indoor Unit....................................................................................................... 164
15-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 167
– 3 –
SAFETY CAUTION
The important contents concerned to the safety are described on the product itself and on this Service Manual.
Please read this Service Manual after understanding the described items thoroughly in the following contents
(Indications/Illustrated marks), and keep them.
[Explanation of indications]
Indication
Explanation
Indicates contents assumed that an imminent danger causing a death or serious injury of
the repair engineers and the third parties when an incorrect work has been executed.
DANGER
Indicates possibilities assumed that a danger causing a death or serious injury of the
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work
when an incorrect work has been executed.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates contents assumed that an injury or property damage (∗) may be caused on the
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work
when an incorrect work has been executed.
∗ Property damage : Enlarged damage concerned to property, furniture, and domestic animal/pet
[Explanation of illustrated marks]
Mark
Explanation
Indicates prohibited items (Forbidden items to do)
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete prohibited contents.
Indicates mandatory items (Compulsory items to do)
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete mandatory contents.
Indicates cautions (Including danger/warning)
The sentences or illustration near or in an illustrated mark describe the concrete cautious contents.
[Confirmation of warning label on the main unit]
Confirm that labels are indicated on the specified positions
(Refer to the Parts disassembly diagram (Outdoor unit).)
If removing the label during parts replace, stick it as the original.
DANGER
Turn “OFF” the breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet, otherwise an electric
shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.
During operation, a high voltage with 400V or higher of circuit (∗) at secondary circuit of the
high-voltage transformer is applied.
If touching a high voltage with the naked hands or body, an electric shock is caused even if using an
electric insulator.
Turn off breaker.
Execute discharge
∗ : For details, refer to the electric wiring diagram.
When removing the front panel or cabinet, execute short-circuit and discharge between
high-voltage capacitor terminals.
If discharge is not executed, an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.
between terminals. After turning off the breaker, high voltage also keeps to apply to the high-voltage capacitor.
Do not turn on the breaker under condition that the front panel and cabinet are removed.
An electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.
Prohibition
– 4 –
WARNING
Before troubleshooting or repair work, check the earth wire is connected to the earth
terminals of the main unit, otherwise an electric shock is caused when a leak occurs.
If the earth wire is not correctly connected, contact an electric engineer for rework.
Check earth wires.
Prohibition of modification.
Use specified parts.
Do not modify the products.
Do not also disassemble or modify the parts. It may cause a fire, electric shock or injury.
For spare parts, use those specified (∗).
If unspecified parts are used, a fire or electric shock may be caused.
∗: For details, refer to the parts list.
Before troubleshooting or repair work, do not bring a third party (a child, etc.) except
the repair engineers close to the equipment.
It causes an injury with tools or disassembled parts.
Do not bring a child
close to the equipment.
Please inform the users so that the third party (a child, etc.) does not approach the equipment.
Connect the cut-off lead wires with crimp contact, etc, put the closed end side
upward and then apply a water-cut method, otherwise a leak or production of fire is
caused at the users’ side.
Insulating measures
When repairing the refrigerating cycle, take the following measures.
1) Be attentive to fire around the cycle. When using a gas stove, etc, be sure to put out fire
before work; otherwise the oil mixed with refrigerant gas may catch fire.
2) Do not use a welder in the closed room.
No fire
When using it without ventilation, carbon monoxide poisoning may be caused.
3) Do not bring inflammables close to the refrigerant cycle, otherwise fire of the welder may
catch the inflammables.
Check the used refrigerant name and use tools and materials of the parts which
match with it.
For the products which use R410A refrigerant, the refrigerant name is indicated at a
position on the outdoor unit where is easy to see. To prevent miss-charging, the route of the
service port is changed from one of the former R22.
For an air conditioner which uses R410A, never use other refrigerant than R410A.
For an air conditioner which uses other refrigerant (R22, etc.), never use R410A.
If different types of refrigerant are mixed, abnormal high pressure generates in the
refrigerating cycle and an injury due to breakage may be caused.
Do not charge refrigerant additionally.
If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in
the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or
refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is
applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury.
Therefore if the refrigerant gas leaks, recover the refrigerant in the air conditioner, execute
vacuuming, and then newly recharge the specified amount of liquid refrigerant.
In this time, never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount.
Refrigerant
When recharging the refrigerant in the refrigerating cycle, do not mix the refrigerant
or air other than R410A into the specified refrigerant.
If air or others is mixed with the refrigerant, abnormal high pressure generates in the
refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of injury due to breakage.
After installation work, check the refrigerant gas does not leak.
If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room, poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire
such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.
Never recover the refrigerant into the outdoor unit.
When the equipment is moved or repaired, be sure to recover the refrigerant with
recovering device. The refrigerant cannot be recovered in the outdoor unit; otherwise a
serious accident such as breakage or injury is caused.
After repair work, surely assemble the disassembled parts, and connect and lead the
removed wires as before. Perform the work so that the cabinet or panel does not
catch the inner wires.
If incorrect assembly or incorrect wire connection was done, a disaster such as a leak or
fire is caused at user’s side.
Assembly/Cabling
– 5 –
WARNING
After the work has finished, be sure to use an insulation tester set (500V Megger) to
check the resistance is 2MΩ or more between the charge section and the non-charge
metal section (Earth position).
If the resistance value is low, a disaster such as a leak or electric shock is caused at user’s
side.
Insulator check
Ventilation
When the refrigerant gas leaks during work, execute ventilation.
If the refrigerant gas touches to a fire, poisonous gas generates.
A case of leakage of the refrigerant and the closed room full with gas is dangerous because
a shortage of oxygen occurs. Be sure to execute ventilation.
When checking the circuit inevitably under condition of the power-ON, use rubber
gloves and others not to touch to the charging section.
If touching to the charging section, an electric shock may be caused.
Be attentive to
electric shock
When the refrigerant gas leaks, find up the leaked position and repair it surely.
If the leaked position cannot be found up and the repair work is interrupted, pump-down
and tighten the service valve, otherwise the refrigerant gas may leak into the room.
The poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking
stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.
When installing equipment which includes a large amount of charged refrigerant
such as a multi air conditioner in a sub-room, it is necessary that the density does
not the limit even if the refrigerant leaks.
Compulsion
If the refrigerant leaks and exceeds the limit density, an accident of shortage of oxygen is
caused.
For the installation/moving/reinstallation work, follow to the Installation Manual.
If an incorrect installation is done, a trouble of the refrigerating cycle, water leak, electric
shock or fire is caused.
After repair work has finished, check there is no trouble.
If check is not executed, a fire, electric shock or injury may be caused.
For a check, turn off the power breaker.
Check after repair
After repair work (installation of front panel and cabinet) has finished, execute a test
run to check there is no generation of smoke or abnormal sound.
If check is not executed, a fire or an electric shock is caused.
Before test run, install the front panel and cabinet.
Check the following items after reinstallation.
Check after reinstallation
1) The earth wire is correctly connected.
2) The power cord is not caught in the product.
3) There is no inclination or unsteadiness and the installation is stable.
If check is not executed, a fire, an electric shock or an injury is caused.
CAUTION
Be sure to put on the gloves (∗) and a long sleeved shirt:
otherwise an injury may be caused with the parts, etc.
(∗) Heavy gloves such as work gloves
Put on gloves
Cooling check
When the power was turned on, start to work after the equipment has been
sufficiently cooled.
As temperature of the compressor pipes and others became high due to cooling/heating
operation, a burn may be caused.
– 6 –
• New Refrigerant (R410A)
This air conditioner adopts a new HFC type refrigerant (R410A) which does not deplete the ozone layer.
1. Safety Caution Concerned to New Refrigerant
The pressure of R410A is high 1.6 times of that of the former refrigerant (R22).
Accompanied with change of refrigerant, the refrigerating oil has been also changed.
Therefore, be sure that water, dust, the former refrigerant or the former refrigerating oil is not mixed into the
refrigerating cycle of the air conditioner with new refrigerant during installation work or service work.
If an incorrect work or incorrect service is performed, there is a possibility to cause a serious accident.
Use the tools and materials exclusive to R410A to purpose a safe work.
2. Cautions on Installation/Service
1) Do not mix the other refrigerant or refrigerating oil.
For the tools exclusive to R410A, shapes of all the joints including the service port differ from those of
the former refrigerant in order to prevent mixture of them.
2) As the use pressure of the new refrigerant is high, use material thickness of the pipe and tools which are
specified for R410A.
3) In the installation time, use clean pipe materials and work with great attention so that water and others do
not mix in because pipes are affected by impurities such as water, oxide scales, oil, etc.
Use the clean pipes.
Be sure to brazing with flowing nitrogen gas. (Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.)
4) For the earth protection, use a vacuum pump for air purge.
5) R410A refrigerant is azeotropic mixture type refrigerant.
Therefore use liquid type to charge the refrigerant. (If using gas for charging, composition of the
refrigerant changes and then characteristics of the air conditioner change.)
3. Pipe Materials
For the refrigerant pipes, copper pipe and joints are mainly used.
It is necessary to select the most appropriate pipes to conform to the standard.
Use clean material in which impurities adhere inside of pipe or joint to a minimum.
1) Copper pipe
<Piping>
The pipe thickness, flare finishing size, flare nut and others differ according to a refrigerant type.
When using a long copper pipe for R410A, it is recommended to select “Copper or copper-base pipe
without seam” and one with bonded oil amount 40mg/10m or less.
Also do not use crushed, deformed, discolored (especially inside) pipes.
(Impurities cause clogging of expansion valves and capillary tubes.)
<Flare nut>
Use the flare nuts which are attached to the air conditioner unit.
2) Joint
The flare joint and socket joint are used for joints of the copper pipe.
The joints are rarely used for installation of the air conditioner. However clear impurities when using them.
– 7 –
4. Tools
1. Required Tools for R410A
Mixing of different types of oil may cause a trouble such as generation of sludge, clogging of capillary,
etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.
1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))
2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)
3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)
The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.
Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability
R410A
Conventional air
air conditioner installation
conditioner installation
No.
Used tool
Usage
Existence of
new equipment
for R410A
Whether conventional
Whether conventional
equipment can be used
equipment
can be used
Flare tool
Pipe flaring
Yes
Yes
Ye s
Ye s
*(Note)
*(Note)
N o
Ye s
*(Note)
No
Copper pipe gauge
for adjusting
projection margin
Flaring by conventional
flare tool
Torque wrench
Gauge manifold
Charge hose
Tightening of flare nut
ꢀ
Evacuating, refrigerant
charge, run check, etc.
N o
No
Vacuum pump adapter Vacuum evacuating
Electronic balance for
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
N o
Ye s
N o
Ye s
Ye s
Ye s
Refrigerant charge
refrigerant charging
Leakage detector
Gas leakage check
(Note) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection
margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.
General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)
In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary
as the general tools.
1) Vacuum pump. Use vacuum pump by
attaching vacuum pump adapter.
2) Torque wrench
3) Pipe cutter
7) Screwdriver (+, –)
8) Spanner or Monkey wrench
9) Hole core drill
4) Reamer
10) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side 4mm)
11) Tape measure
5) Pipe bender
6) Level vial
12) Metal saw
Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.
1) Clamp meter
2) Thermometer
3) Insulation resistance tester (Megger)
4) Electroscope
– 8 –
1. SPECIFICATIONS
1-1. Indoor Unit
1-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
Model
RAV-SM564UT-E
RAV-SM804UT-E
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.3
5.6
7.1
8.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
(A)
(kW)
(%)
6.82 – 6.25
8.72 – 7.99
1.47
98
1.86
97
Cooling
Heating
Power factor
EER
3.61
A
3.82
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
5.61 – 5.14
1.21
98
8.95 – 8.20
1.91
97
COP
4.63
A
4.19
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Maximum current
Main unit
(A)
13.30
20.30
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Appearance
Model
RBC-U31PG (W, WS)-E, RBC-U31PGS (W, WS)-E
(W) : 2.5GY 9.0/0.5, (WS) : 2.5GY 9.0/0.5, 8B3/0.3
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
Panel color
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
256
840
840
30
256
840
840
30
Main unit
Outer
dimension
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
950
950
20
950
950
20
Main unit
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
4.2
4.2
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Turbo fan
Fan
Fan unit
Air filter
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
17.5 / 14.5 / 13.0
14
20.5 / 16.0 / 13.5
20
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,
AX31U (W, WS)-E, TCB-AX21E2
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
32 / 29 / 28
47 / 44 / 43
12.7
35 / 31 / 28
50 / 46 / 43
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
(mm)
6.4
9.5
(mm)
VP25
∗ : IEC standard
– 9 –
1-1-2. Concealed DuctType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
Model
RAV-SM562BT-E
RAV-SM802BT-E
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.0
5.6
7.1
8.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
7.24 – 6.63
10.36 – 9.49
1.56
98
2.21
Cooling
97
EER
3.21
A
3.21
Energy efficiency class*
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
10.36 – 9.49
2.21
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
7.19 – 6.59
1.55
98
Heating
97
COP
3.61
A
3.62
Energy efficiency class *
A
Maximum current
(A)
13.60
20.60
Appearance
Main unit
Main unit
Main unit
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
320
700
800
30
320
1000
800
39
Outer
dimension
Total weight
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Centrifugal
Fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0 / 11.9 / 9.8
120
19.0 / 16.2 / 13.3
120
TCB-UFM21BE
TCB-UFH61BE
TCB-UFM21BFCE
TCB-UFH61BFCE
TCB-UFM31BE
TCB-UFH71BE
TCB-UFM21BFCE
TCB-UFH61BFCE
Air filter (Sold separately)
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,
TCB-AX21E2
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
40 / 37 / 33
55 / 52 / 48
12.7
40 / 37 / 34
55 / 52 / 49
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
(mm)
6.4
9.5
(mm)
VP25
∗ : IEC standard
– 10 –
1-1-3. Under CeilingType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
Model
RAV-SM562CT-E
RAV-SM802CT-E
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.0
5.6
7.1
8.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
7.24 – 6.63
10.36 – 9.49
1.56
98
2.21
Cooling
97
EER
3.21
A
3.21
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
10.12 – 9.28
2.16
Electrical
(A)
(kW)
(%)
6.82 – 6.25
1.47
98
characteristics
Heating
97
COP
3.81
A
3.70
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
Maximum current
(A)
13.50
20.50
Appearance
Main unit
Main unit
Main unit
Fan
Shine white
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
210
910
680
21
210
1180
680
25
Outer
dimension
Total weight
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Centrifugal
Fan unit
Air filter
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0 / 11.2 / 10.0
60
18.5 / 16.7 / 14.6
60
Attached main unit
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,
TCB-AX21E2, AX22CE2
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
36 / 33 / 30
51 / 48 / 45
12.7
38 / 36 / 33
53 / 51 / 48
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
(mm)
6.4
9.5
(mm)
VP25
∗ : IEC standard
– 11 –
1-1-4. High WallType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
Model
RAV-SM562KRT-E
RAV-SM802KRT-E
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.0
5.6
6.9
8.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
7.24 – 6.63
11.25 – 10.31
1.56
98
2.40
Cooling
97
EER
3.21
A
2.88
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
C
Electrical
(A)
(kW)
(%)
7.19 – 6.59
1.55
98
11.25 – 10.31
characteristics
2.40
97
Heating
COP
3.61
A
3.33
C
Energy efficiency class ∗
Maximum current
(A)
13.40
20.40
Appearance
Main unit
Main unit
Main unit
Fan
Pure white
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
298
998
221
12
298
998
221
12
Outer
dimension
Total weight
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Cross flow fan
Fan unit
Air filter
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
14.0 / 12.5 / 10.7
30
18.5 / 14.6 / 12.2
30
Attached main unit
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,
TCB-AX21E2
Controller (Sold separately)
(FCU comes with WH-H2UE)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
39 / 36 / 33
54 / 51 / 48
12.7
45 / 41 / 36
60 / 56 / 51
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
(mm)
6.4
9.5
(mm)
VP16
∗ : IEC standard
– 12 –
1-1-5. Compact 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType (600 × 600)
<Single type>
Indoor unit
RAV-SM
402MUT-E
452MUT-E
562MUT-E
Model
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP 404AT(Z)(ZG)-E 454AT(Z)(ZG)-E 564AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
3.6
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.6
4.5
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
5.05 – 4.63
5.82 – 5.33
7.24 – 6.63
1.00
1.19
1.56
98
Cooling
90
93
EER
3.60
3.36
3.21
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
A
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
4.79 – 4.39
5.67 – 5.20
7.14 – 6.55
1.54
98
0.97
92
1.16
Heating
93
COP
4.12
A
3.88
3.64
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
Maximum current
Main unit
(A)
—
—
13.60
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
RBC-UM11PG (W)-E
Appearance
Model
Panel color
Height
Width
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
Moon-white (Muncel 2.5GY 9.0/0.5)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
268
Main unit
575
Depth
575
Outer
dimension
Height
Width
27
700
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
Depth
700
Main unit
17
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
3
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Turbo fan
Fan
Fan unit
Air filter
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
11.0 / 9.2 / 7.8
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1
60
Long life filter
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,
TCB-AX21E2
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
40 / 36 / 31
55 / 51 / 46
43 / 39 / 34
58 / 54 / 49
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
12.7
6.4
Connecting pipe
(mm)
(mm)
VP25
∗ : IEC standard
– 13 –
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-SM402MUT-E
RAV-SM402MUT-E
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E
7.1
Model
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
(kW)
8.0
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
10.36 – 9.49
2.21
Cooling
97
3.21
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
10.12 – 9.28
2.16
Heating
Fan
97
COP
3.70
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
Turbo fan
11.0 / 9.2 / 7.8
60
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
40 / 36 / 31
55 / 51 / 46
(dB•A)
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
5
Min. length
Max. total length
50
Refrigerant
pipe
Refrigerant charging amount
(Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m
(31m to 50m)
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
Height
difference
Fan
Propeller fan
50
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
63
Main
(mm)
15.9
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
Connecting
pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
48 / 49
64 / 65
∗ : IEC standard
– 14 –
1-1-6. Slim DuctType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
RAV-SM
404SDT-E
454SDT-E
564SDT-E
Model
Outdoor unit
Cooling capacity
RAV-SP 404AT(Z)(ZG)-E 454AT(Z)(ZG)-E 564AT(Z)(ZG)-E
(kW)
(kW)
3.6
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.6
Heating capacity
4.5
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
5.20 – 4.77
5.87 – 5.38
7.24 – 6.63
1.03
90
1.20
1.56
98
Cooling
93
EER
3.50
A
3.33
3.21
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
Electrical
(A)
(kW)
(%)
4.94 – 4.53
1.00
92
5.62 – 5.15
6.68 – 6.12
1.44
98
characteristics
1.15
Heating
93
COP
4.00
A
3.91
3.89
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
Maximum current
(A)
15.00
15.00
13.60
Appearance
Main unit
Main unit
Main unit
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
210
845
Outer
dimension
645
Total weight
22
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Centrifugal
Fan
Fan unit
Air filter
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
11.5 / 10.0 / 8.7
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7
60
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)
RBC-AMT31E, AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2,
TCB-AX21E2
Controller (Sold separately)
Under air inlet
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
39 / 36 / 33
30 / 28 / 26
54 / 51 / 48
45 / 43 / 41
45 / 40 / 36
33 / 31 / 28
60 / 55 / 51
48 / 46 / 43
Sound
pressure level
Back air inlet
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
H/M/L
H/M/L
Sound
power level
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
12.7
6.4
Connecting pipe
(mm)
(mm)
VP25
∗ : IEC standard
– 15 –
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-SM404SDT-E
RAV-SM404SDT-E
RAV-SP804AT(Z)(ZG)-E
7.1
Model
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
(kW)
8.0
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
10.36 – 9.49
2.21
Cooling
97
3.21
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
10.12 – 9.28
2.16
Heating
Fan
97
COP
3.70
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
Centrifugal
11.5 / 10.0 / 8.7
60
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
H/M/L
H/M/L
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
39 / 36 / 33
30 / 28 / 26
54 / 51 / 48
45 / 43 / 41
Sound
pressure level
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
Sound
power level
(dB•A)
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
Min. length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
5
Max. total length
50
Refrigerant
pipe
Refrigerant charging amount
(Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m
(31m to 50m)
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
Height
difference
Fan
Propeller fan
50
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
63
Main
(mm)
15.9
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
Connecting
pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
48 / 49
64 / 65
∗ : IEC standard
– 16 –
1-2. Outdoor Unit
<Super Digital Inverter>
Model name
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP 404AT(Z)(ZG)-E 454AT(Z)(ZG)-E 564AT(Z)(ZG)-E 804AT(Z)(ZG)-E
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
(Power exclusive to outdoor is required.)
Power supply
Type
Hermetic compressor
Compressor Motor
Pole
(kW)
(kg)
1.1
4
1.1
4
1.1
4
2.0
4
Refrigerant charged
Refrigerant control
1.0
1.0
1.4
2.1
Pulse motor valve
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
5
7.5
5
7.5
5
7.5
5
Min. length
Max. total length
30
30
50
50
Inter
connecting
pipe
Additional refrigerant charge
under long piping connector
20g/m
(21m to 30m)
20g/m
(21m to 30m)
20g/m
(21m to 50m)
40g/m
(31m to 50m)
Outdoor lower
Height
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
difference
Outdoor higher
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
550
780
290
550
780
290
550
780
290
890
900
320
Outer
dimension
Appearance
Total weight
Silky shade (Muncel 1Y 8.5/0.5)
(kg)
40
40
44
63
Heat exchanger
Fan
Finned tube
Propeller fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
40
43
40
43
40
43
50
63
Gas side
(mm)
12.7
6.4
12.7
6.4
12.7
6.4
15.9
9.5
Connecting
pipe
Liquid side
(mm)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating (dB•A)
Cooling/Heating (dB•A)
45 / 47
62 / 64
45 / 47
62 / 64
47 / 48
63 / 64
48 / 49
64 / 65
Outside air temperature, Cooling
Outside air temperature, Heating
(°C)
(°C)
43 to – 15°C
15 to – 15°C
15 to – 20°C
– 17 –
1-3. Operation Characteristic Curve
• Operation characteristic curve <Super Digital Inverter>
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E
<Cooling>
<Heating>
10
9
16
14
12
10
8
RAV-SM5562BT, CCT, KRT,, MUT-E,
RAV-SM5564SDT-E
RAV-SM5562BT, CCT, KRT,, MUT-E,
RAV-SM5564SDT-E
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
RAV-SM5564UT-E
RAV-SM5564UT-E
4
• Conditions
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C
Air flow : High
2
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Compressor speed (rps)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Compressor speed (rps)
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
<Cooling>
<Heating>
22
20
13
12
11
18
16
RAV-SSM802BBT, CT,, KRT-E
RAV-SM802BT, CT, KRT-E
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
12
10
8
RAV-SM8804UT-E
RAV-SM8804UT-E
6
• Conditions
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C
Air flow : High
4
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
2
0
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Compressor speed (rps)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Compressor speed (rps)
– 18 –
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
<Cooling>
<Heating>
14
16
14
12
10
8
12
10
8
SP45
SP45
SP40
6
6
SP40
4
4
• Conditions
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C
Air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
Indoor : DB20˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Air flow : High
2
2
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
0
0
0
20
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
0
20
40
60
80 90 100
120
Compressor speed (rps)
Compressor speed (rps)
• Capacity variation ratio according to temperature
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
<Cooling>
<Heating>
105
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
• Conditions
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
-20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2
0
2
4
6
8 10
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
– 19 –
2. CONSTRUCTION VIEWS (EXTERNAL VIEWS)
2-1. Indoor Unit
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
845
21
803 (inside)
21
Refrigerant piping
103
Air filter
31
805
910
59
80
33
163
Fresh air inlet
(knock-out hole)
Drain-up port
Hung-up plate
– 20 –
2-2. Outdoor Unit
RAV-SP404AT(Z)(ZG)-E, RAV-SP454AT(Z)(ZG)-E, RAV-SP564AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Drain hole
(2-Ø20 × 88 long hole)
Drain hole (Ø25)
600
90
54
2-Ø11-14 U-shape hole
(For Ø8-Ø10 anchor bolts)
A legs
108 125
Connecting pipe port
(Gas flare side: Ø12.7)
Connecting pipe port
(Liquid flare side: Ø6.4)
30
8-Ø6 hole
(For fixing outdoor unit)
B legs
2-Ø11 × L14 long hole
(For Ø8-Ø10 anchor bolts)
483
108
257
157
79
69.5
147
145
143
25
22
31
32
500
71
342
780
Earth
terminal
Charge port
Discharge guard
Discharge guide mounting hole
(4-Ø4.5 embossing)
Space required for service
600
2-Ø11 × 14 U-shape holes
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)
Suction port
300
or more
150
or more
Discharge
port
(Minimum
distance up to wall)
500
or more
Discharge
port
2-Ø11 × 14 long hole
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)
600
Ø11 × 14 U-shape holes
54
38
2-Ø6 hole
Product
external
line
R15
2-Ø6 hole
R15
600
38
54
Product
external line
Ø11 × 14 U-shape hole
Details of A legs
Details of B legs
– 21 –
Name
Note
380
Drain hole (Ø25 burring hole)
B legs
200
60
Refrigerant piping hole
Indoor/Outdoor unit
——
1
2
Air inlet
port
connecting wire inlet hole
Power supply inlet hole
Ø38 Kockout hole
Air inlet
port
Mounting bolt hole
(Ø12 × 17 long hole)
12
75
Air outlet
port
383
Mounting bolt hole
(Ø12 × 17 U-shape hole)
A legs
70
39
96
5-drain hole
(Ø20 × 88 burring hole)
Details of A legs
Details of B legs
150
600
900
52
550
320
Refrigerant pipe
connecting port
30
(Ø9.5 flare at liquid side)
Refrigerant pipe
connecting port
(Ø15.9 flare at gas side)
2
1
2
1
1
Mounting hole sold separately
(12 - Ø3 emboss)
60
68
178
327
178
518
178
80
18
18
80
12
64
135
151
400
83
7
Z
Knockout for downward piping
Unit : mm
Z views
RAV-TWP30E2, RAV-TWP50E2 (SimultaneousTwin)
Inner diameter Ø C
Inner
diameter Ø D
Inner
diameter Ø D
A
Model (RBC-)
Liquid side
A
B
C
D
36
43
34
44
14
23
14
21
Ø9.5
Ø6.4
TWP30E2
Gas side
Liquid side
Gas side
Ø15.9 Ø12.7
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
Ø15.9 Ø15.9
TWP50E2
– 23 –
3. SYSTEMATIC REFRIGERATING CYCLE DIAGRAM
3-1. Indoor Unit
• Single type (Combination of 1 indoor unit and 1 outdoor unit)
(Indoor unit)
Distributor
(Strainer incorporated)
TCJ sensor
Strainer
Air heat
exchanger
TC sensor
Heating
Cooling
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØB)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side
(Outer dia : ØA)
To outdoor unit
To outdoor unit
Capillary tube specifications
Model
RAV-SM∗∗∗UT
Inner dia. × Length × Q’ty
Ø2 × 250 × 2, Ø2 × 350 × 1
Ø2 × 700 × 1
SM56 type
Dimension table
SM80 type
Ø2 × 250 × 3, Ø2 × 500 × 1
Outer diameter of refrigerant pipe
Indoor unit
Gas side ØA
12.7
Liquid side ØB
Model
RAV-SM∗∗∗SDT
Inner dia. × Length × Q’ty
SM40, 45, 56 type
SM80 type
6.4
9.5
15.9
SM40, 45, 56 type
Ø2 × 200 × 2, Ø2 × 350 × 1
• Twin type (Combination of 2 indoor units and 1 outdoor unit)
Heating
Cooling
(Indoor unit A)
(Indoor unit B)
Distributor
Distributor
(Strainer incorporated)
(Strainer incorporated)
TCJ sensor
TCJ sensor
Strainer
Strainer
Air heat
exchanger
Air heat
exchanger
TC sensor
TC sensor
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØA)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side
(Outer dia : ØB)
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØA)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side
(Outer dia : ØB)
Branch pipe
Branch pipe
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØD)
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØC)
To outdoor unit
To outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Branch pipe RBC-
A
B
C
D
SM40 × 2
TWP30E2
6.4
12.7
9.5
15.9
– 24 –
3-2. Outdoor Unit
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
Packed valve
Packed valve
Outer dia. ØB
Outer dia. ØA
PMV
(Pulse Motor Valve)
(CAM-B30YGTF-2)
TS sensor
TO sensor
2-step muffler
Ø19.05 × 200L
TD sensor
Strainer
4-way valve
(STF-0108Z)
TE
sensor
Heat exchanger
Ø8 ripple, 2 rows,
14 steps
Muffler
Ø19 × L160
Distributor
FP1.3 flat fin
Rotary compressor
(DA150A1F-20F)
R410A 1.0 kg
Cooling
Heating
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor
Discharge
Suction
exchanger
exchanger
frequency
fan
(rps)
Pd
Ps
Pd
Ps
(TD)
61
(TS)
12
14
4
(TC)
11
15
2
(TE)
43
50
8
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.68 0.94 27.3
9.6
47
50
44
49
49
90
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27 / 19
32 / 24
18 / 15.5
20 / –
35 / –
43 / –
–5 / –
7 / 6
3.23 1.16 32.9 11.8
77
1.34 0.70 13.7
2.38 0.70 24.3
7.1
7.1
36
Standard
65
7
39
54
32
4
Heating Overload
Low load
3.39 1.03 34.6 10.5
1.95 0.26 19.9 2.7
83
20
–17
16
–19
30 / –
24 / 18
–15 / –
90
15 / –
∗ This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp
meter becomes 2 times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor
Discharge
Suction
exchanger
exchanger
frequency
fan
(rps)
Pd
Ps
Pd
Ps
(TD)
68
(TS)
11
14
4
(TC)
10
15
2
(TE)
41
51
8
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.81 0.89 28.7
9.1
53
53
44
56
49
98
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27 / 19
32 / 24
18 / 15.5
20 / –
35 / –
43 / –
–5 / –
7 / 6
3.24 1.16 33.0 11.8
78
1.34 0.70 13.7
2.53 0.68 25.8
7.1
6.9
36
Standard
70
7
41
54
33
4
Heating Overload
Low load
3.39 1.03 34.6 10.5
2.00 0.25 20.4 2.6
83
20
–17
16
–19
30 / –
24 / 18
–15 / –
92
15 / –
∗ This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp
meter becomes two times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).
– 25 –
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E
PMV
(Pulse Motor Valve)
(CAM-B30YGTF-2)
TO sensor
TS
sensor
TD
sensor
TE sensor
Muffler
Ø31.75 × 200L
4-way valve
(STF-0213Z)
Muffler
Ø19.05 × 160L
Heat exchanger
Ø8 ripple, 2 rows, 20 stages
FP1.3, flat fin
Strainer
Refrigerant pipe
Distributor
Accumulator
(1L)
at liquid side Ø6.4
Packed valve
Rotary compressor
(DA150A1F-21F)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side Ø12.7
Packed valve
2-step muffler
Ø25 × 200L
In cooling operation
In heating operation
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pd Ps Pd Ps
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor
Discharge
Suction
exchanger
exchanger
frequency
fan
(rps)
(TD)
72
(TS)
16
(TC)
13
19
7
(TE)
42
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.87 1.00 29.3 10.2
3.57 1.10 36.4 11.2
58
76
30
64
30
88
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27 / 19
32 / 24
18 / 15.5
20 / –
35 / –
43 / –
–5 / –
7 / 6
88
20
52
1.71 0.76 17.4
2.26 0.68 23.1
7.8
6.9
45
12
13
Standard
66
6
37
53
34
3
Heating Overload
Low load
3.25 1.14 33.2 11.6
2.00 0.25 20.4 2.6
78
20
16
30 / –
24 / 18
–15 / –
78
–18
–18
15 / –
– 26 –
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
TS sensor
PMV
(Pulse Motor Valve)
(CAM-B30YGTF-2)
TO sensor
TL sensor
Ø2 × Ø3 × 600L
TD
sensor
Ø2 × Ø3 × 550L
Accumulator
Sub-ass’y
Strainer
Ø2 × Ø3 × 450L
TE sensor
4-way valve
(STF-0218G)
Ø2 × Ø3
× 450L
Muffler
Capillary
Heat exchanger
Ø8, 2 rows, 34 stages
FP1.45, flat fin
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side Ø9.5
Packed valve
Ø25 × L180
Ø25 × L210
Accumulator
(1.8L)
Rotary compressor
(DA220A2F-22L)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side Ø15.9
Ball valve
Strainer
In cooling operation
In heating operation
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor
Discharge
Suction
exchanger
exchanger
frequency
fan
(rps)
Pd
Ps
Pd
Ps
(TD)
70
(TS)
13
17
7
(TC)
11
14
3
(TE)
39
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.79 0.89 27.3
8.7
58.2
65.0
30.0
61.5
28.0
99.6
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27 / 19
32 / 24
35 / –
43 / –
3.53 1.07 34.6 10.5
81
48
1.71 0.72 16.8
2.65 0.68 26.0
7.1
6.7
42
18
18 / 15.5 –15 / –
Standard
74
4
44
52
31
3
20 / –
30 / –
15 / –
7 / 6
Heating Overload
Low load
3.20 1.11 31.4 10.9
2.33 0.21 22.8 2.1
76
19
–18
15
24 / 18
–20 / –
93
–20
– 27 –
4. FAN CHARACTERISTICS
4-1. Slim Duct (Filter Attached)
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E
Standard air volume : 690m³/h
60
50
40
30
20
High (50Pa)
Upper limit of external
static pressure(50Pa)
High
(35Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(35Pa)
pressure (50Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (35Pa)
Low (50Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure
(20Pa)
High
(20Pa)
Low (35Pa)
Low (20Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (20Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(10Pa)
High
(10Pa)
10
0
Low (10Pa)
Standard filte
pressure loss
400
500
600
700
800
Air volume (m³/h)
RAV-SM564SDT-E
Standard air volume : 780m³/h
60
50
40
30
20
High (50Pa)
Upper limit of external
static pressure(50Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (50Pa)
High
(35Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(35Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (35Pa)
Low (50Pa)
High
(20Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure
(20Pa)
Low (35Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (20Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(10Pa)
High
(10Pa)
10
0
Low (20Pa)
Low (10Pa)
Standard filte
pressure loss
400
500
600
700
800
900
Air volume (m³/h)
– 28 –
5. WIRING DIAGRAM
5-1. Indoor Unit
5-1-1. Slim DuctType
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
FM
DM
FS
CN333
(WHI)
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CN510
(WHI)
CN504 CN34
(WHI) (RED)
Motor drive
circuit
1
2
1
2
CN104
(YEL)
TA
TCJ
TC
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN334
(WHI)
1
2
1
2
CN102
(RED)
1
2
1
2
CN101
(BLK)
Fuse, F01
T6.3A, 250V~
Fuse, F02
T3.15A, 250V~
+
–
~
~
RED
WHI
BLK
1
2
3
4
DC20V
CN519
1
3
5
1
3
5
Power
supply
circuit
DC15V
(WHI)
DC12V
DC7V
CN67
(BLK)
1
2
CN508
(RED)
Control P.C. Board
for Indoor Unit
MCC-1570
1
2
3
CN80
P01
BLK
(GRN)
1
2
CN73
(RED)
(EXCT)
1
2
CN66
(WHI)
1
2
CN70
(WHI)
CN41
(BLU)
CN309
(YEL)
CN61 CN32
(YEL) (WHI)
CN60
(WHI)
CN50
(WHI)
CN20
(BLU)
1
1
2
3
3
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
(T10)
(Fan drive)
Indoor unit
earth screw
CN51
(RED)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
BLK
BLK
1 2 3
1 2 3
A B
P.C. board
MCC-1440
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
A
B
Terminal
CN001
(WHI)
U3 U4
for central
Serial
signal
remote controller
Wired
Adapter for
Connection interface
(Option)
remote controller wireless remote controller
L N
Signal phase
220–240V~, 50Hz
Color
Identification
Outdoor unit
Symbol
FM
Parts name
BLK : BLACK
BLU : BLUE
RED : RED
GRN : GREEN
WHI : WHITE
Fan Motor
TA
Indoor temp. sensor
Temp. sensor
TC, TCJ
DM
Outdoor unit
earth screw
Drain pump Motor
Float Switch
YEL : YELLOW
FS
– 29 –
49C
ORN
ORN
2 2
1 1
CN500
CN300
Compressor
RED
WHI
BLK
P04
P05
P06
BLK
WHI
RED
1 1
2 2
3 3
3 3
2 2
1 1
Q200~205
IGBT
Q300~305
MOS-FET
CM
FM
P.C. Board
(MCC-5009)
R221
R321
Fan motor
P25
6 6
5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
YEL
R220
R219
R320
R319
P24
P23
PMV
YEL
BRN
YEL
CN700
P22
P21
Pulse motor valve
F03
CAUTION : HIGH VOLTAGE
P20
P35
Varistor
L03
C13
Fuse
L01
3 3
2
T3.15A
AC250V
The high voltage circuit is
incorporated.
P34
DB01
CN603 1 1
Be careful to do the check service,
as the electric shock may be
caused in case of touching
parts on the
TS
(Suction pipe
temp. sensor)
Surge
absorber
2 2
C12 C14
CN602 1 1
P.C. board by hand
Power
relay
TO
(Outdoor
temp. sensor)
Varistor
P19
3 3
2
CN601 1 1
DB02
The 4-way valve coil is turned on
while the cooling operation
CT
ORN
F01
Fuse
T25A
AC250V
P18
P11
TD
Relay
(Discharge pipe
temp. sensor)
2 2
1 1
2 2
CN600 1 1
P08
Reactor
TE
Q404
P02
WHI CN806
P03 P10
ORN BLK
(Condenser pipe
temp. sensor)
P33
P32
CN701
P30
P7
1 2 3
1 2 3
1
1
3
3
1 2 3 4 5
For optional P.C. Board
CN605
BLK
P31
BLK
2 1
2 1
PUR
Coil for
4-WAY
VALVE
Reactor
1 2 3
1 2 3
NOTE
CM : Compressor
PMV : Pulse Motor Valve
FM : Fan Motor
SW802
GRN/YEL
Fuse 250V~
T6.3A
Reactor
MCC-1530
RED
TE : Heat Exchanger Temp. Sensor
TD : Discharge Temp. Sensor
TO : Outdoor Temp. Sensor
TS : Suction Temp. Sensor
IGBT : Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
DB : Rectifier
Sub P.C. Board
Color Identification
BLK : BLACK WHI : WHITE
BLU : BLUE
RED : RED
GRY : GRAY
PNK : PINK
GRN : GREEN
1 2 3 L N
BRN : BROWN
ORN : ORANGE
YEL : YELLOW
PUR : PURPLE
CT : Curreut Transformer
49C : Compressor Case Thermostat
To indoor
Power supply
220-240V~ 50Hz
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
<MCC-1571>
CM
Reactor
Reactor
(RED) (WHI) (BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(WHI)
(WHI)
U
V
W
P04 P05
P06 P07
CN200 CN201 CN202
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN300
(WHI)
FM
49C
SW804 SW801 SW800
1
2
1
2
CN609
(BLU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN610
(YEL)
Control P.C. Board
MCC-1571
SW803
1
2
1
2
CN604
(WHI)
TL
L/F
1
3
1
2
3
CN603
(WHI)
TD
Fuse, F01
T25A, 250V~
1
2
1
2
CN602
(YEL)
(BLK)
TO
TE
P09
SW802
Fuse, F03
T10A, 250V~
1
2
1
2
CN601
(WHI)
RY704
1
3
1
2
3
CN600
(WHI)
TS
CN704
(BLU)
CN701
(WHI)
CN04
(WHI)
P01
P02
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
1
3
1
1
4
4
1
1
3
3
5
5
7
7
CN710
(WHI)
(RED)
(WHI)
PMW
20SF
Earth
screw
Earth
screw
1 2 3
1 2 3
L
N
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Symbol
CM
FM
PMV
TD
TS
TE
TL
TO
Parts name
Compressor
Fan Motor
Power supply
220–240V~, 50Hz
Pulse Motor Valve
Earth
screw
Pipe temp. sensor (Discharge)
Pipe temp. sensor (Suction)
Heat exchanger sensor 1
Heat exchanger sensor 2
Outside temp. sensor
4-way valve coil
20SF
49C
RY
Color
Identification
Compressor case thermostat
Relay
L/F
Line Filter
BLK
BLU
RED : RED
GRY : GRAY
WHI
YEL
: BLACK
: BLUE
1.
indicates the terminal block.
Alphanumeric characters in the cycle indicate the terminal No.
2. The two-dot chain line indicates the wiring procured locally.
3. indicates the P.C. board.
: WHITE
: YELLOW
4. For the indoor unit circuit, refer to the wiring diagram of the indoor unit.
– 31 –
6. SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
6-1. Indoor Unit
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
No.
1
Parts name
Fan motor
Type
SWF-280-60-3
Specifications
—
—
—
2
Drain pump motor
Float switch
TA sensor
MDP-1401
3
FS-0218-102
4
Lead wire length : 328mm
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200 mm Vinyl tube (Black)
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200 mm Vinyl tube (Red)
10 kΩ at 25°C
5
TC sensor
10 kΩ at 25°C
6
TCJ sensor
10 kΩ at 25°C
6-2. Outdoor Unit (Parts Ratings)
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E
No.
Parts name
Type
Specifications
1
Fan motor
Compressor
Reactor
ICF-140-43-4R
Output (Rated) 43 W
40, 45 : DA150A1F-20F
40, 56 : DA150A1F-21F
2
3 phase, 4P, 1100 W
3
4
CH-57
10mH, 16A
Outdoor temp. sensor (To sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (Te sensor)
Suction temp. sensor (Ts sensor)
Discharge temp. sensor (Td sensor)
Fuse (Switching power (Protect))
Fuse (Inverter, input (Current protect))
4-way valve solenoid coil
—
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
50 kΩ at 25°C
T3.15A, AC 250V
AC240V
5
—
6
—
7
—
8
—
—
9
10
11
12
STF-01AJ502E1
US-622
—
Compressor thermo. (Protection)
Coil (Pulse Motor Valve)
OFF: 125 ± 4°C, ON: 90 ± 5°C
—
CAM-MD12TF-12
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
No.
1
Parts name
Type
Specifications
—
Compressor
Outdoor fan motor
Reactor
DA220A2F-22L
2
ICF-280-A60-1
Output 60 W
3
CH-56
5.8 mH, 18.5 A
AC200 – 240 V
DC12 V
4
4-way valve coil
PMV coil
VHV-01AP552B1
5
CAM-MD12TF-15
6
P.C. board
MCC-1571
AC220 – 240 V
AC250 V, 25 A
AC250 V, 10 A
AC250 V, 3.15 A
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
50 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
OFF: 125 ± 4°C, ON: 90 ± 5°C
7
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)
—
—
8
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)
9
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)
—
10
11
12
13
14
Outdoor temp. sensor (TO sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (Te sensor)
Discharge temp. sensor (Td sensor)
Heat exchanger Temp sensor (Ts sensor)
Compressor thermo. (Protection)
—
—
—
—
US-622
– 32 –
7. REFRIGERANT R410A
This air conditioner adopts the new refrigerant HFC
(R410A) which does not damage the ozone layer.
6. When an air conditioning system charged with a
large volume of refrigerant is installed in a small
room, it is necessary to exercise care so that,
even when refrigerant leaks, its concentration
does not exceed the marginal level.
The working pressure of the new refrigerant R410A
is 1.6 times higher than conventional refrigerant
(R22). The refrigerating oil is also changed in
accordance with change of refrigerant, so be careful
that water, dust, and existing refrigerant or
refrigerating oil are not entered in the refrigerant
cycle of the air conditioner using the new refrigerant
during installation work or servicing time.
If the refrigerant gas leakage occurs and its
concentration exceeds the marginal level, an
oxygen starvation accident may result.
7. Be sure to carry out installation or removal
according to the installation manual.
The next section describes the precautions for air
conditioner using the new refrigerant.
Improper installation may cause refrigeration
trouble, water leakage, electric shock, fire, etc.
Conforming to contents of the next section together
with the general cautions included in this manual,
perform the correct and safe work.
8. Unauthorized modifications to the air conditioner
may be dangerous. If a breakdown occurs
please call a qualified air conditioner technician
or electrician.
Improper repair may result in water leakage,
electric shock and fire, etc.
7-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing
As R410A’s pressure is about 1.6 times higher than
that of R22, improper installation/servicing may
cause a serious trouble. By using tools and
materials exclusive for R410A, it is necessary to
carry out installation/servicing safely while taking
the following precautions into consideration.
7-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation
7-2-1. Piping Materials and Joints Used
For the refrigerant piping installation, copper pipes
and joints are mainly used.
1. Never use refrigerant other than R410A in an air
conditioner which is designed to operate with
R410A.
Copper pipes and joints suitable for the refrigerant
must be chosen and installed.
Furthermore, it is necessary to use clean copper
pipes and joints whose interior surfaces are less
affected by contaminants.
If other refrigerant than R410A is mixed,
pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes
abnormally high, and it may cause personal
injury, etc. by a rupture.
1. Copper Pipes
2. Confirm the used refrigerant name, and use
tools and materials exclusive for the refrigerant
R410A.
It is necessary to use seamless copper pipes
which are made of either copper or copper alloy
and it is desirable that the amount of residual oil
is less than 40 mg/10 m.
The refrigerant name R410A is indicated on the
visible place of the outdoor unit of the air
conditioner using R410A as refrigerant.
Do not use copper pipes having a collapsed,
deformed or discolored portion (especially on
the interior surface).
To prevent mischarging, the diameter of the
service port differs from that of R22.
Otherwise, the expansion valve or capillary tube
may become blocked with contaminants.
3. If a refrigeration gas leakage occurs during
installation/servicing, be sure to ventilate fully.
As an air conditioner using R410A incurs pres-
sure higher than when using R22, it is necessary
to choose adequate materials.
If the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire,
a poisonous gas may occur.
Thicknesses of copper pipes used with R410A
are as shown in Table 7-2-1. Never use copper
pipes thinner than 0.8mm even when it is avail-
able on the market.
4. When installing or removing an air conditioner,
do not allow air or moisture to remain in the
refrigeration cycle.
Otherwise, pressure in the refrigeration cycle
may become abnormally high so that a rupture
or personal injury may be caused.
NOTE:
5. After completion of installation work, check to
make sure that there is no refrigeration gas
leakage.
Refer to the “7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping
of R22 or R407C”.
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the room, coming
into contact with fire in the fan-driven heater,
space heater, etc., a poisonous gas may occur.
– 33 –
Table 7-2-1 Thicknesses of annealed copper pipes
Thickness (mm)
Nominal diameter
Outer diameter (mm)
R410A
0.80
R22
0.80
0.80
0.80
1.00
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.80
12.7
15.9
0.80
1.00
1. Joints
For copper pipes, flare joints or socket joints are used. Prior to use, be sure to remove all contaminants.
a) Flare Joints
Flare joints used to connect the copper pipes cannot be used for pipings whose outer diameter exceeds
20 mm. In such a case, socket joints can be used.
Sizes of flare pipe ends, flare joint ends and flare nuts are as shown in Tables 7-2-3 to 7-2-5 below.
b) Socket Joints
Socket joints are such that they are brazed for connections, and used mainly for thick pipings whose
diameter is larger than 20 mm. Thicknesses of socket joints are as shown in Table 7-2-2.
Table 7-2-2 Minimum thicknesses of socket joints
Reference outer diameter of
copper pipe jointed (mm)
Minimum joint thickness
(mm)
Nominal diameter
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
12.7
15.9
7-2-2. Processing of Piping Materials
When performing the refrigerant piping installation, care should be taken to ensure that water or dust does not
enter the pipe interior, that no other oil other than lubricating oils used in the installed air conditioner is used,
and that refrigerant does not leak.
When using lubricating oils in the piping processing, use such lubricating oils whose water content has been
removed. When stored, be sure to seal the container with an airtight cap or any other cover.
1. Flare Processing Procedures and Precautions
a) Cutting the Pipe
By means of a pipe cutter, slowly cut the pipe so that it is not deformed.
b) Removing Burrs and Chips
If the flared section has chips or burrs, refrigerant leakage may occur.
Carefully remove all burrs and clean the cut surface before installation.
– 34 –
c) Insertion of Flare Nut
d) Flare Processing
Make certain that a clamp bar and copper pipe have been cleaned.
By means of the clamp bar, perform the flare processing correctly.
Use either a flare tool for R410A or conventional flare tool.
ØD
A
Flare processing dimensions differ according
to the type of flare tool.
When using a conventional flare tool, be sure
to secure “dimension A” by using a gauge for
size adjustment.
Fig. 7-2-1 Flare processing dimensions
Table 7-2-3 Dimensions related to flare processing for R410A / R22
A (mm)
Outer
diameter
(mm)
Nominal
diameter
Thickness
(mm)
Conventional flare tool
(R410A)
Conventional flare tool
(R22)
Flare tool for
R410A, R22
clutch type
Clutch type Wing nut type Clutch type Wing nut type
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.5 to 2.0
1.5 to 2.0
2.0 to 2.5
2.0 to 2.5
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 1.0
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.5 to 2.0
1.5 to 2.0
12.7
15.9
Table 7-2-4 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R410A
Dimension (mm)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
Thickness
(mm)
Flare nut width
(mm)
(mm)
A
B
C
D
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
9.1
9.2
6.5
13
20
23
25
17
22
26
29
13.2
16.6
19.7
13.5
16.0
19.0
9.7
12.7
15.9
12.9
16.0
Table 7-2-5 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R22
Dimension (mm)
Flare nut width
(mm)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
Thickness
(mm)
(mm)
A
B
C
D
17
22
24
27
36
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
6.4
9.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
9.1
9.2
6.5
13
20
20
23
34
13.0
16.2
19.4
23.3
13.5
16.0
19.0
24.0
9.7
12.7
15.9
19.0
12.9
16.0
19.2
– 35 –
D
B
A
C
Fig. 7-2-2 Relations between flare nut and flare seal surface
2. Flare Connecting Procedures and Precautions
a) Make sure that the flare and union portions do not have any scar or dust, etc.
b) Correctly align the processed flare surface with the union axis.
c) Tighten the flare with designated torque by means of a torque wrench.
The tightening torque for R410A is the same as that for conventional R22.
Incidentally, when the torque is weak, the gas leakage may occur.
When it is strong, the flare nut may crack and may be made non-removable.
When choosing the tightening torque, comply with values designated by manufacturers.
Table 7-2-6 shows reference values.
NOTE:
When applying oil to the flare surface, be sure to use oil designated by the manufacturer.
If any other oil is used, the lubricating oils may deteriorate and cause the compressor to burn out.
Table 7-2-6 Tightening torque of flare for R410A [Reference values]
Tightening torque of torque
wrenches available on the market
N•m (kgf•m)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
(mm)
Tightening torque
N•m (kgf•m)
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
14 to 18 (1.4 to 1.8)
33 to 42 (3.3 to 4.2)
50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2)
63 to 77 (6.3 to 7.7)
16 (1.6), 18 (1.8)
42 (4.2)
12.7
15.9
55 (5.5)
65 (6.5)
– 36 –
7-3. Tools
7-3-1. RequiredTools
Refer to the “4.Tools” (Page 8)
7-4. Recharging of Refrigerant
When it is necessary to recharge refrigerant, charge the specified amount of new refrigerant according to the
following steps.
Recover the refrigerant, and check no refrigerant
remains in the equipment.
When the compound gauge’s pointer has indicated
–0.1 Mpa (–76 cmHg), place the handle Low in the
fully closed position, and turn off the vacuum pump’s
power switch.
Connect the charge hose to packed valve service
port at the outdoor unit’s gas side.
Keep the status as it is for 1 to 2 minutes, and ensure
that the compound gauge’s pointer does not return.
Connect the charge hose of the vacuum pump
adapter.
Set the refrigerant cylinder to the electronic balance,
connect the connecting hose to the cylinder and the
connecting port of the electronic balance, and charge
liquid refrigerant.
Open fully both packed valves at liquid and gas
sides.
Place the handle of the gauge manifold Low in the
fully opened position, and turn on the vacuum pump’s
power switch. Then, evacuating the refrigerant in the
cycle.
(For refrigerant charging, see the figure below.)
1) Never charge refrigerant exceeding the specified amount.
2) If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, charge refrigerant bit by bit in COOL mode.
3) Do not carry out additional charging.
When additional charging is carried out if refrigerant leaks, the refrigerant composition changes in the
refrigeration cycle, that is characteristics of the air conditioner changes, refrigerant exceeding the
specified amount is charged, and working pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally high
pressure, and may cause a rupture or personal injury.
(INDOOR unit)
(Liquid side)
(OUTDOOR unit)
Opened
Closed
(Gas side)
Refrigerant cylinder
(With siphon pipe)
Check valve
Open/Close valve
for charging
Service port
Electronic balance for refrigerant charging
Fig. 7-4-1 Configuration of refrigerant charging
– 37 –
1) Be sure to make setting so that liquid can be charged.
2) When using a cylinder equipped with a siphon, liquid can be charged without turning it upside down.
It is necessary for charging refrigerant under condition of liquid because R410A is mixed type of refrigerant.
Accordingly, when charging refrigerant from the refrigerant cylinder to the equipment, charge it turning the
cylinder upside down if cylinder is not equipped with siphon.
[ Cylinder with siphon ]
[ Cylinder without siphon ]
Gauge manifold
Gauge manifold
OUTDOOR unit
OUTDOOR unit
c y l i n d e r
a n t i g e r R e f r
Refrigerant
cylinder
Electronic
balance
Electronic
balance
Siphon
R410A refrigerant is HFC mixed refrigerant.
Therefore, if it is charged with gas, the
composition of the charged refrigerant changes
and the characteristics of the equipment varies.
Fig. 7-4-2
7-5. Brazing of Pipes
7-5-1. Materials for Brazing
1. Silver brazing filler
1) Phosphor bronze brazing filler tends to react
with sulfur and produce a fragile compound
water solution, which may cause a gas
leakage. Therefore, use any other type of
brazing filler at a hot spring resort, etc., and
coat the surface with a paint.
Silver brazing filler is an alloy mainly composed
of silver and copper.
It is used to join iron, copper or copper alloy, and
is relatively expensive though it excels in solder-
ability.
2) When performing brazing again at time of
servicing, use the same type of brazing filler.
2. Phosphor bronze brazing filler
7-5-2. Flux
Phosphor bronze brazing filler is generally used
to join copper or copper alloy.
1. Reason why flux is necessary
• By removing the oxide film and any foreign
matter on the metal surface, it assists the flow
of brazing filler.
3. Low temperature brazing filler
Low temperature brazing filler is generally called
solder, and is an alloy of tin and lead.
• In the brazing process, it prevents the metal
surface from being oxidized.
Since it is weak in adhesive strength, do not use
it for refrigerant pipes.
• By reducing the brazing filler's surface tension,
the brazing filler adheres better to the treated
metal.
– 38 –
2. Characteristics required for flux
7-5-3. Brazing
• Activated temperature of flux coincides with
the brazing temperature.
As brazing work requires sophisticated techniques,
experiences based upon a theoretical knowledge, it
must be performed by a person qualified.
• Due to a wide effective temperature range, flux
is hard to carbonize.
In order to prevent the oxide film from occurring in
the pipe interior during brazing, it is effective to
proceed with brazing while letting dry Nitrogen gas
flow.
• It is easy to remove slag after brazing.
• The corrosive action to the treated metal and
brazing filler is minimum.
• It excels in coating performance and is
harmless to the human body.
Never use gas other than Nitrogen gas.
1. Brazing method to prevent oxidation
As the flux works in a complicated manner as
described above, it is necessary to select an
adequate type of flux according to the type and
shape of treated metal, type of brazing filler and
brazing method, etc.
1) Attach a reducing valve and a flow-meter to
the Nitrogen gas cylinder.
2) Use a copper pipe to direct the piping
material, and attach a flow-meter to the
cylinder.
3. Types of flux
• Noncorrosive flux
3) Apply a seal onto the clearance between the
piping material and inserted copper pipe for
Nitrogen in order to prevent backflow of the
Nitrogen gas.
Generally, it is a compound of borax and boric
acid.
It is effective in case where the brazing
temperature is higher than 800°C.
4) When the Nitrogen gas is flowing, be sure to
keep the piping end open.
• Activated flux
Most of fluxes generally used for silver brazing
are this type.
5) Adjust the flow rate of Nitrogen gas so that it
is lower than 0.05 m³/Hr or 0.02 MPa
It features an increased oxide film removing
capability due to the addition of compounds
such as potassium fluoride, potassium chloride
and sodium fluoride to the borax-boric acid
compound.
(0.2kgf/cm²) by means of the reducing valve.
6) After performing the steps above, keep the
Nitrogen gas flowing until the pipe cools down
to a certain extent (temperature at which
pipes are touchable with hands).
7) Remove the flux completely after brazing.
4. Piping materials for brazing and used
brazing filler/flux
Piping
material
Used brazing
filler
Used
flux
M
Flow meter
Copper - Copper Phosphor copper Do not use
Copper - Iron
Iron - Iron
Silver
Silver
Paste flux
Vapor flux
Stop valve
Nitrogen gas
cylinder
From Nitrogen cylinder
1) Do not enter flux into the refrigeration cycle.
2) When chlorine contained in the flux remains
within the pipe, the lubricating oil deteriorates.
Pipe
Nitrogen
gas
Therefore, use a flux which does not contain
chlorine.
Rubber plug
3) When adding water to the flux, use water
which does not contain chlorine
(e.g. distilled water or ion-exchange water).
4) Remove the flux after brazing.
Fig. 7-5-1 Prevention of oxidation during brazing
– 39 –
7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C
6. Check the oil when the existing air conditioner was
Instruction of Works:
removed after refrigerant had been recovered.
The existing R22 and R407C piping can be
reused for our digital inverter R410A products
installations.
In this case, if the oil is judged as clearly different
compared with normal oil
• The refrigerator oil is copper rust green :
There is possibility that moisture is mixed with the
oil and rust generates inside of the pipe.
NOTE)
Confirmation of existence of scratch or dent of the
former pipes to be applied and also confirmation of
reliability of the pipe strength are conventionally
referred to the local site.
• There is discolored oil, a large quantity of the
remains, or bad smell.
• A large quantity of sparkle remained wear-out
powder is observed in the refrigerator oil.
If the definite conditions can be cleared,
it is possible to update the existing R22 and
R407C pipes to those for R410A models.
7. The air conditioner which compressor was ex-
changed due to a faulty compressor.
When the discolored oil, a large quantity of the
remains, mixture of foreign matter, or a large
quantity of sparkle remained wear-out powder is
observed, the cause of trouble will occur.
7-6-1. Basic Conditions Needed to Reuse the
Existing Pipe
Check and observe three conditions of the refrigerant
piping works.
8. Installation and removal of the air conditioner are
repeated with temporary installation by lease and
etc.
1. Dry
(There is no moisture inside of the pipes.)
2. Clean (There is no dust inside of the pipes.)
3. Tight (There is no refrigerant leak.)
9. In case that type of the refrigerator oil of the
existing air conditioner is other than the following oil
(Mineral oil), Suniso, Freol-S, MS (Synthetic oil),
alkyl benzene (HAB, Barrel-freeze), ester series,
PVE only of ether series.
7-6-2. Restricted Items to Use the Existing Pipes
In the following cases, the existing pipes cannot be
reused as they are. Clean the existing pipes or
exchange them with new pipes.
• Winding-insulation of the compressor may
become inferior.
1. When a scratch or dent is heavy, be sure to use the
new pipes for the works.
NOTE)
2. When the thickness of the existing pipe is thinner
than the specified “Pipe diameter and thickness” be
sure to use the new pipes for the works.
The above descriptions are results of confirmation by
our company and they are views on our air
conditioners, but they do not guarantee the use of the
existing pipes of the air conditioner that adopted
R410A in other companies.
• The operating pressure of R410A is high
(1.6 times of R22 and R407C). If there is a scratch
or dent on the pipe or thinner pipe is used, the
pressure strength is poor and may cause break-
age of the pipe at the worst.
7-6-3. Branching Pipe for Simultaneous
Operation System
• In the concurrent twin system, when TOSHIBA-
specified branching pipe is used, it can be reused.
∗ Pipe diameter and thickness (mm)
Branching pipe model name: RBC-TWP30E-2.
Pipe outer diameter Ø6.4 Ø9.5 Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0
On the existing air conditioner for simultaneous
operation system (twin system), there is a case of
using branch pipe that has insufficient compressive
strength.
R410A
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
Thickness
R22
(R407C)
In this case please change it to the branch pipe for
R410A.
• In case that the pipe diameter is Ø12.7 mm or less
and the thickness is less than 0.7 mm, be sure to
use the new pipes for works.
7-6-4. Curing of Pipes
When removing and opening the indoor unit or outdoor
unit for a long time, cure the pipes as follows:
3. The pipes are left as coming out or gas leaks.
(Poor refrigerant)
• There is possibility that rain water or air including
moisture enters in the pipe.
• Otherwise rust may generate when moisture or
foreign matter due to dewing enters in the pipes.
4. Refrigerant recovery is impossible.
(Refrigerant recovery by the pump-down operation
on the existing air conditioner)
• The rust cannot be removed by cleaning, and a new
piping work is necessary.
• There is possibility that a large quantity of poor
oil or moisture remains inside of the pipe.
Place position
Outdoors
Term
Curing manner
1 month or more
Less than 1 month
Every time
Pinching
5. A dryer on the market is attached to the existing pipes.
• There is possibility that copper green rust
generated.
Pinching or taping
Indoors
– 40 –
7-6-5. Final Installation Checks
Is there no scratch or dent on the existing pipes?
Existing pipe: NO * Use a new pipes.
NO
Is it possible to operate the existing air conditioner?
YES
∗ After the existing air conditioner operated in cooling mode
for approx. 30 minutes or longer*, recover the refrigerant.
∗ For cooling the pipes and recovering of oil
• Refrigerant recovery: Pump down method
Nitrogen gas pressure 0.5 Mpa
∗ Remove the existing air conditioner from the piping and
carry out flashing (nitrogen pressure 0.5 Mpa) to remove
the remains inside of the pipe.
Note] In case of twin, also be sure to flash the
branching pipe.
(If there is discharge of remains,
it is judged that there is a large quantity of remains.)
Was not largely discolored oil or
a large quantity of remains discharged?
(When the oil deteriorates, the color of the
oil changes to muddy and black color.)
NO
Clean the pipes or use the new pipes.
If you are in trouble of
pipe cleaning, please contact us.
YES
ꢀ Connect the indoor/outdoor units to the existing pipe.
• Use a flare nut attached to the main unit for the
indoor/outdoor units.
(Do not use the flare nut of the existing pipe.)
• Re-machine the flare machining size to size for R410A.
Piping necessary to change the flare nut/
machining size due to pipe compression.
ꢀ In case that the gas pipe Ø19 mm is used for the
outdoor unit of SM803 (3 HP) or higher:
(Gas pipe size of our R410A model 3 is Ø15.9 mm)
1) Flare nut width: H
(mm)
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0
→ Turn the existing pipe switch on the cycle control
Copper pipe
outer dia.
Ø6.4
Ø9.5
P.C board of the outdoor unit to ON side.
At shipment from factory OFF → ON for existing pipe
(Refer to the table below.) (Be sure to set the contents
in the table below in order to restrict the refrigerating
cycle pressure of the equipment in the pipe standard.)
17
22
26
24
29
27
36
For R410A
H
Same
For R22
Same as above
as above
Existing pipe SW
Switch
2) Flare machining size: A
(mm)
Copper pipe
outer dia.
Ø6.4
Ø9.5
13.2
13.0
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0
3 HP
Bit 3 of SW802 → ON
A
9.1
9.0
16.6
16.2
19.7
19.4
24.0
23.3
For R410A
For R22
Becomes large a little for R410A
Do not apply the refrigerator oil to the flare surface.
∗ (Airtight test), Vacuum dry, Refrigerant charge,
Gas leak check
Trial run
– 41 –
RAV-SP804AT-E
7-6-6. Handling of Existing Pipe
• To use an existing Ø19.1 mm pipe, set bit 3 of
SW802 (switch for existing pipe) on the P.C. board
of the outdoor unit to ON.
When using the existing pipe, carefully check it for
the following:
• Wall thickness (within the specified range)
• Scratches and dents
In this case, the heating performance may be
reduced depending on the outside air temperature
and room temperature.
• Water, oil, dirt, or dust in the pipe
• Flare looseness and leakage from welds
• Deterioration of copper pipe and heat insulator
SW802
Cautions for using existing pipe
When shipped from factory
When using existing pipe
• Do not reuse the flare to prevent gas leak.
Replace it with the supplied flare nut and then
process it to a flare.
• Blow nitrogen gas or use an appropriate means to
keep the inside of the pipe clean.
If discolored oil or much residue is discharged,
wash the pipe.
• Check welds, if any, on the pipe for gas leak.
When the pipe corresponds to any of the follow-
ing, do not use it. Install a new pipe instead.
• The pipe has been open (disconnected from
indoor unit or outdoor unit) for a long period.
• The pipe has been connected to an outdoor unit
that does not use refrigerant R22, R410A or
R407C.
• The existing pipe must have a wall thickness equal
to or larger than the following thickness.
Reference outside diameter
(mm)
Wall thickness
(mm)
Ø9.5
Ø15.9
Ø19.1
0.8
1.0
1.0
• Never use any pipe with a wall thickness less than
these thicknesses due to insufficient pressure
capacity.
– 42 –
8. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT (Slim DuctType)
8-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram
8-1-1. Connection of Wired Remote Controller
Wired remote controller (Max. 2 units)
Weekly timer
Display LCD
Display LED
Function setup
Key switch
Display LCD
LCD driver
MCU
Function setup
Key switch
CN2
CN1
MCU
DC5V
DC5V
Remote controller
communication circuit
Power circuit
∗3
Power
circuit
Secondary
battery
Indoor unit
#1 (Master)
#2
(Follower)
A
#3
A
B
(Follower)
B
A
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)
DC20V
Remote controller
EEPROM
TA sensor
TC sensor
TCJ sensor
Float input
HA
communication circuit
DC5V
DC12V
Humidifier output
Same as left
Same as left
Drain
pump
∗2
∗2
Driver
MCU
Auto grille
panel
Outside
output
Indoor
MCU
fan motor
Serial send/
receive circuit
Run
Warning
Defrost
Thermo. ON
COOL
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC
Fan motor
control circuit
synchronous
signal input circuit
HEAT
FAN
Power circuit
DC280V
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter
Case of TCC-LINK adapter
(Option)
Outdoor unit
Up to 8 units are connectable. ∗1
TCC-LINK
adapter P.C. board
(MCC-1440)
∗1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of mounting network adapter
TCC-LINK
Central controller
(Option)
U3
U4
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
when two wired remote controllers are connected.
∗2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.
∗3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub remote controller is unavailable.
– 43 –
8-1-2. Connection of Wireless Remote Controller Kit
Indoor unit
#1 (Master)
Wireless remote controller kit
Receiver P.C. board (MCC-1504)
Display LED
Receive circuit
Buzzer
Function setup SW
Grille up/down SW
MCU
DC5V
Power
circuit
Remote controller
communication circuit
Temporary
operation SW
#2
(Follower)
A
#3
(Follower)
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)
DC20V
Remote controller
EEPROM
TA sensor
TC sensor
TCJ sensor
Float input
HA
communication circuit
DC5V
DC12V
Humidifier output
Same as left
Same as left
Drain
pump
∗2
∗2
Driver
MCU
Auto grille
panel
Outside
output
Indoor
MCU
fan motor
Serial send/
receive circuit
Run
Warning
Defrost
Thermo. ON
COOL
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC
Fan motor
control circuit
synchronous
signal input circuit
HEAT
FAN
Power circuit
DC280V
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter
Case of TCC-LINK adapter
(Option)
Outdoor unit
TCC-LINK
adapter P.C. board
(MCC-1440)
Up to 8 units are connectable. ∗1
TCC-LINK
Central controller
(Option)
U3
U4
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
∗1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of mounting network adapter
when two wireless remote controller kit are connected.
∗2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.
– 44 –
8-1-3. Connection of Both Wired Remote Controller and Wireless Remote Controller Kit
Indoor unit
#1 (Master)
Master wired remote controller
Wireless remote controller kit
(Max. 2 units)
Weekly timer
Receiver P.C. board
(MCC-1504)
Display LED
Display
LCD
Function
setup
Display
LCD
LCD
driver
Receive
circuit
Function setup SW
Grille up/down SW
Display
LED
Key
MCU
switch
Function
setup
MCU
CN2
CN1
Buzzer
MCU
Key
switch
DC5V
Remote controller
communication circuit
Power
circuit
DC5V
DC5V
∗3
Power
circuit
Remote controller
communication circuit
Temporary
operation SW
Power
circuit
Secondary
battery
A
B
A
B
#2
(Follower)
A
#3
(Follower)
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)
DC20V
Remote controller
communication circuit
EEPROM
TA sensor
TC sensor
DC5V
DC12V
Humidifier output
Same as left
Same as left
TCJ sensor
Float input
HA
Drain
pump
∗2
∗2
Driver
MCU
Auto grille
panel
Outside
output
Indoor
MCU
fan motor
Serial send/
receive circuit
Run
Warning
Defrost
Thermo. ON
COOL
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC
Fan motor
control circuit
synchronous
signal input circuit
HEAT
FAN
Power circuit
DC280V
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter
Case of TCC-LINK adapter
(Option)
Outdoor unit
TCC-LINK
adapter P.C. board
(MCC-1440)
Up to 8 units are connectable. ∗1
∗1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of mounting network adapter.
TCC-LINK
Central controller
(Option)
U3
U4
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
∗2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.
∗3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub remote controller is unavailable.
∗4 In the left system, set the wireless remote controller side as the follower
remote controller when using the wired remote controller as the master
remote controller.
– 45 –
8-2. Indoor Controls (Slim DuctType)
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
1) Distinction of outdoor unit
Remarks
1
When power
supply is reset
When the power supply is reset, the outdoors are distin-
guished and the control is selected according to the
distinguished result.
2) Setting of indoor fan speed and existence of air direction
adjustment
Based on EEPROM data, select setting of the indoor fan
speed and the existence of air direction adjustment.
Air speed (rpm)/
Air direction adjustment
2
Operation
mode selection
1) Based on the operation mode selecting command from the
remote controller, the operation mode is selected.
Remote controller
Control outline
command
STOP
FAN
Air conditioner stops.
Fan operation
COOL
DRY
Cooling operation
Dry operation
HEAT
AUTO
Heating operation
Ta: Room temp.
Ts: Setup temp.
To: Outside temp.
• COOL/HEAT operation mode is
automatically selected by Ta, Ts
and To for operation.
• The operation is performed as
shown in the following figure
according to Ta value at the first
time only. (In the range of Ts +
α –1 < Ta < Ts + α + 1, Cooling
thermo. OFF (Fan)/Setup air
volume operation continues.)
Cooling
operation
+1.0
Cooling thermo. OFF (Fan)
• Setup air volume
Ta
(˚C)
Ts + α
-1.0
Heating
operation
• α is corrected according to the outside temperature.
Outside temp.
No To
Correction value (a)
0K
–1K
0K
k = deg
To ≥ 24°C
24 > To ≥ 18°C
To < 18°C
To error
+1K
0K
3
Room temp.
control
1) Adjustment range: Remote controller setup temperature (°C)
COOL/DRY
18 to 29
HEAT
AUTO
18 to 29
17 to 27
Wired type
18 to 29
16 to 30
Wireless type
18 to 30
– 46 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
Shift of suction
temperature in heating
operation
3
Room temp.
control
(Continued)
2) Using the Item code 06, the setup temperature in heating
operation can be corrected.
Setup data
0
2
4
6
Setup temp. correction
+0°C
+2°C
+4°C
+6°C
Setting at shipment
Setup data
2
4
Automatic
capacity control
1) Based on the difference between Ta and Ts, the operation
frequency is instructed to the outdoor unit.
2) Cooling operation
(GA control)
Every 90 seconds, the room temperature difference
between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain
the correction value of the frequency command and then
the present frequency command is corrected.
Ta (n) – Ts (n) : Room temp. difference
n
: Counts of detection
Ta (n-1) – Ts (n) : Varied room temp. value
n – 1 Counts of detection of 90 seconds before
3) Heating operation
:
Every 1 minute (60 sec.), the room temperature differ-
ence between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain
the correction value of the frequency command and then
the present frequency command is corrected.
Ts (n) – Ta (n)
n
: Room temp. difference
: Counts of detection
Ta (n) – Ta (n – 1): Varied room temp. value
n – 1
: Counts of detection of 1 minute before
4) Dry operation
The frequency correction control is same as those of the
cooling operation.
However the maximum frequency is limited to approxi-
mately “S6”.
Note) When LOW is set up, the maximum frequency is
limited to approximately “SB”.
5
Automatic
cooling/heating
control
1) The judgment of selecting COOL/HEAT is carried out as
shown below. When +1.5 exceeds against Tsh 10 minutes
and after thermo.-OFF, heating operation (Thermo. OFF)
exchanges to cooling operation. Description in the
Tsc: Setup temp. in
cooling operation
Tsh: Setup temp. in
heating operation
+ temp. correction of
room temp. control
parentheses shows an example of cooling ON/OFF.
Ta
(˚C)
Cooling
+1.5
(Cooling ON)
Tsc
or
Tsh
(Cooling OFF)
-1.5
Heating
When –1.5 lowers against Tsc 10 minutes and after
thermo. OFF, cooling operation (Thermo. OFF) exchanges
to heating operation.
2) For the automatic capacity control after judgment of
cooling/heating, see Item 4.
3) For temperature correction of room temp. control in
automatic heating, see Item 3.
– 47 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
6
Air speed selection 1) Operation with (HH), (H), (L) or [AUTO] mode is carried
out by the command from the remote controller.
HH > H+ > H > L+ >
L > UL
2) When the air speed mode [AUTO] is selected, the air
speed varies by the difference between Ta and Ts.
<COOL>
Ta (˚C)
A
+3.0
HH
B
C
+2.5
+2.0
+1.5
+1.0
+0.5
Tsc
(HH)
H+ (HH)
H (HH)
L+ (H+)
L (H)
D
E
L (H)
F
–0.5
L (L+)
G
• Controlling operation in case when thermo of remote
controller works is same as a case when thermo of the
body works.
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed
for 3 minutes. However when the air volume is exchanged,
the air speed changes.
• When cooling operation has started, select a downward
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the
air speed does not change.
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic
cooling operation.
<HEAT>
Ta (˚C)
L (L+)
(–0.5) –1.0
E
L+ (H)
(0) Tsh
H (H+)
(+0.5) +1.0
D
H+
(HH)
(+1.0) +2.0
C
HH
(HH)
(+1.5) +3.0
B
A
(+2.0) +4.0
Value in the parentheses indicates one when thermostat of
the remote controller works.
Value without parentheses indicates one when thermostat of
the body works.
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed
for 1 minute. However when the air speed I exchanged, the
air speed changes.
• When heating operation has started, select an upward
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the
air speed does not change.
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic
heating operation.
Tc: Indoor heat
exchanger sensor
temperature
• In Tc ≥ 60°C, the air speed increases by 1 step.
– 48 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
6
Air speed
Slim Duct Type
selection
(Continued):
In case of
Selection of high static
pressure type
Standard
0
Type 1
1
Type 3
3
Type 6
6
Item code
[5d]
Item code:
Slim Duct Type
SW501 (1)/(2)
OFF/OFF
ON/OFF
OFF/ON
ON/ON
[5d] or selection of high
static pressure on P.C.
board SW501
Tap
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL
HH
H+
H
HH
H+
H
HH
HH
HH
HH
H+
H
H+
H
L+
L+
HH
HH
H+
H
H+
H
L+
LL
L+
LL
H+
H
H+
H
L+
LL
L+
LL
L+
L
L+
L
LL
LL
LL
LL
Slim Duct Type
SM40
SM45
SM56
Tap
Revolution speed (rpm)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
1260
1180
1120
1040
1020
990
1260
1180
1120
1040
1020
990
1320
1220
1220
1220
1180
1180
1180
1040
990
960
960
950
950
910
910
870
870
990
840
840
880
790
790
820
550
550
550
3) In heating operation, the mode changes to [UL] if
thermostat is turned off.
4) If Ta ≥ 25°C when heating operation has started and when
defrost operation has been cleared, the air conditioner
operates with (H) mode or higher mode for 1 minute after
Tc entered in E zone of cool air discharge preventive
control (Item 7).
– 49 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
7
Cool air discharge
preventive control
1) In heating operation, the indoor fan is controlled
In D and E zones, the
based on the detected temperature of Tc sensor or priority is given to air
Tcj sensor. As shown below, the upper limit of the
revolution frequency is restricted.
volume selection setup
of remote controller.
However B zone is assumed as C zone for
6 minutes and after when the compressor activated.
In A zone while thermo
is ON, [PRE-HEAT
(Heating ready)] is
displayed.
In defrost operation, the control value of Tc is
shifted by 6°C.
Tc
(˚C)
Tcj
HH
32
H
30
L
E zone
28
UL
D zone
26
OFF
C zone
B zone
A zone
20
16
8
Freeze preventive control 1) The cooling operation (including Dry operation) is
Tcj:
(Low temperature release)
performed as follows based on the detected
temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.
Indoor heat exchanger
sensor temperature
When [J] zone is detected for 6 minutes
(Following figure), the commanded frequency is
decreased from the real operation frequency.
After then the commanded frequency changes
every 30 seconds while operation is performed in
[J] zone.
In [K] zone, time counting is interrupted and the
operation is held.
When [ I ] zone is detected, the timer is cleared
and the operation returns to the normal operation.
If the commanded frequency becomes S0
because the operation continues in [J] zone, the
return temperature A is raised from 5°C to 12°C
until [ I ] zone is detected and the indoor fan
operates with [L] mode.
(˚C)
A
5
I
K
2
J
In heating operation, the freeze-preventive control
works if 4-way valve is not exchanged and the
following conditions are satisfied.
(However the temperature for J zone dashing
control is changed from 2°C to –5°C.)
Tcn:
Tc temperature when 5
minutes elapsed after
activation
Tc (n – 1):
<Conditions>
Tc temperature at start
time
• When
or
is established 5 minutes after
activation.
Tcn ≤ Tc (n – 1) – 5
Tcn < Tc (n – 1) – 1 and Tcn ≤ Ta < 5°C
– 50 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
9
High-temp.
release control
1) The heating operation is performed as follows based on the
detected temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.
• When [M] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is
decreased from the real operation frequency. After then
the commanded frequency changes every 30 seconds
while operation is performed in [M] zone.
However this control is
ignored in case of the
follower unit of the twin.
• In [N] zone, the commanded frequency is held.
• When [L] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is
returned to the original value by approx. 6Hz every
60 seconds.
Tc(˚C)
Setup at shipment
M
N
Tcj
A
B
Control temp. (°C)
A
B
56 (54)
52 (52)
L
NOTE:
Same status as that
when “thermostat-OFF”
(status that the air
When the operation has started or when Tc or Tcj < 30°C at
start of the operation or after operation start, temperature is
controlled between values in parentheses of A and B.
conditioner enters in the
room temp. monitor
mode when the
temperature reached the
setup temperature on
the remote controller)
10 Drain pump
control
1) In cooling operation (including Dry operation), the drain
pump is usually operated.
2) If the float switch works while drain pump drives, the
compressor stops, the drain pump continues the operation,
and a check code is output.
Check code [P10]
3) If the float switch works while drain pump stops, the
compressor stops and the drain pump operates. If the float
switch keeps operating for approx. 4 minutes, a check code
is output.
11 After-heat
elimination
When heating operation stops, in some cases, the indoor fan
operates with (L) for approx. 30 seconds.
is displayed.
– 51 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
In the group
operation, use this
control by
12 HA control
1) This control is connected to TV control or remote start/
stop I/F, etc, and start/stop are available by HA signal
input from the remote position.
connecting to either
master or follower
indoor unit.
2) This control outputs start/stop status to HA output
terminal.
3) I/O specifications conform to JEMA regulations.
4) This control outputs [Operation OFF (STOP) signal] to HA
output terminal while self-cleaning works. However selection
of [Operation ON (Operating) signal] is possible by changing
[0000 (At shipment)] of Item code (DN) [CC] to [0001].
In this case, if HA is input during self-clean operation during
operation of the air conditioner, the self-clean operation is not
performed. (Unit stops.)
13 Frequency fixed
operation (Test run)
<In case of wired remote controller>
Command frequency
is approximately [S7]
1) When pushing [CHK] button for 4 seconds or more,
[TEST] is displayed on the display screen and the mode
enters in Test run mode.
2) Push [ON/OFF] button.
3) Using [MODE] button, set the mode to [COOL] or [HEAT].
• Do not use other mode than [COOL]/[HEAT] mode.
• During test run operation, the temperature cannot be
adjusted.
• An error is detected as usual.
• A frequency fixed operation is performed.
4) After the test run, push [ON/OFF] button to stop the
operation. (Display in the display part is same as the
procedure in Item 1.)
5) Push [CHK] button to clear the test run mode.
([TEST] display in the display part disappears and the
status returns to the normal stop status.)
14 Filter sign display
(Except wireless type)
1) The operation time of the indoor fan is calculated, the filter
reset signal is sent to the remote controller when the
specified time (2500H) has passed, and it is displayed on
LCD.
[FILTER
] goes on.
∗ It is provided on the
separately sold type
TCB-AX21E2.
2) When the filter reset signal has been received from the
remote controller, time of the calculation timer is cleared.
In this case, the measurement time is reset if the
specified time has passed, and display on LCD
disappears.
– 52 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
15 Central control mode 1) Setting at the centerl controller side enables to select the
selection
contents which can be operated on the remote controller
at indoor unit side.
2) Setup contents
• 64 line central controller (TCB-SC642TLE2)
Display at remote
controller side
(No display)
[Individual]: Operated on the remote controller
(Priority to second pushing)
[Central 1]: ON/OFF operation cannot be operated on
the remote controller.
[Central
] goes on
[Central 2]: ON/OFF, mode selection, temp. setup
operations cannot be operated on the
remote controller.
[Central
] goes on
[Central 3]: Mode selection and temp. setup operations
cannot be operated on the remote controller.
[Central
[Central
] goes on
] goes on
[Central 4]: Mode selection cannot be operated on the
remote controller.
∗ In case of the wireless type, the display lamp does not
change but the contents are same. If operating an item
which is prohibited by the central control mode from the
remote controller, it is notified with the receive sound,
Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi (5 times).
16 Energy-saving
control
1) Selecting [AUTO] mode enables an energy-saving to be
operated.
(In case of connect-
ing SDI outdoor unit)
2) The setup temperature is shifted (corrected) in the range
not to lose the comfort ability according to input values of
various sensors.
3) Data (Input value room temp. Ta, Outside temp. To, Air
volume, Indoor heat exchanger sensor temp. Tc) for
20 minutes are taken the average to calculate correction
value of the setup temperature.
4) The setup temperature is shifted every 20 minutes, and
the shifted range is as follows.
In cooling time: +1.5 to – 1.0K
In heating time: –1.5 to +1.0K
17 Max. frequency cut
control
1) This control is operated by selecting [AUTO] operation mode.
2) COOL operation mode:
It is controlled according to the
following figure if To < 28°C.
3) HEAT operation mode:
It is controlled according to the
following figure if To > 15°C.
Max. frequency is
restricted to approximately
the rated heating frequency
Ta(˚C)
Ta(˚C)
Tsh
Normal control
+4
+3
–3
Tsc
–4
Normal control
Max. frequency is
restricted to approximately
the rated cooling frequency
– 53 –
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
18 DC motor
1) When the fan operation has started, positioning of the stator
and the rotor are performed.
(Moves slightly with tap sound)
2) The motor operates according to the command from the
indoor controller.
Notes)
• When the fan rotates while the air conditioner stops due to
entering of outside air, etc, the air conditioner may operate while
the fan motor stops.
Check code [P12]
• When a fan lock is found, the air conditioner stops, and an error
is displayed.
SAVE
19 Save operation 1) Turn on
2) During operation of save operation,
remote controller.
button on the remote controller.
Operation and display
also are unavailable
on the wired remote
controller RBC-
SAVE
lights on the wired
3) During save operation, the current release control is performed
AMT31E and before.
with the restriction ratio set in EEPROM on the outdoor unit.
SAVE
Carry out setting
operation during stop
of the unit; otherwise
the unit stops
4) The restriction ratio can be set by keeping
button
pushed for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.
5) When validating the save operation, the next operation starts
with save operation valid because contents are held even
when operation stops, operation mode changes or power
supply is reset.
operation.
For the setup opera-
tion, refer to “How to
set up contents of
save operation” of
Installation Manual.
6) The restriction ratio can be set by changing the setup data of
Item code (DN) [C2] in the range of 50 to 100%
(every 1%, Setting at shipment: 75%).
20 8°C heating/
Frost protective
operation
1) This functional is intended for the cold latitudes and performs
objective heating operation (8°C heating operation).
2) This function is valid only for combination with the outdoor
units (Super Digital Inverter (SDI) 4-series outdoor units).
In a group connection,
if there is even one
combination with other
unit, “This function is
not provided.” is
3) Using the indoor DN code [D1] (1 bit), Valid/Invalid of this
function is set up at the customer’s side.
∗ The setup by DN code is Invalid [0]/Valid [1] and Invalid [0]
has been set at the shipment.
displayed.
4) This operation is the heating operation which sets 8°C as the
setup temperature of the target.
5) This function starts operation by pushing temperature button
The setup tempera-
ture jumps from [18]
to [8].
during heating operation; besides by pushing
button
for 4 seconds or more after temperature reached the minimum
set temperature.
6) To stop/release this operation, select and execute one from
the following operations.
Push
button: Heating operation (18°C setting) continues.
Push [START/STOP] button: Air conditioner stops.
(Heating 18°C operation at the next start)
MODE
Push
: Other operation mode is selected and the
operation continues.
7) As the setup temperature is 8°C and the human heating is not
targeted, the cold air discharge preventive control (Item 7) is
made invalid to suppress the intermittent operation.
8) The settings of the air direction and air volume are
changeable during this operation.
9) The indoor fan stops to protect the compressor for 2 minutes
after start of heating operation (Thermo-ON) by this function.
– 54 –
Function
Connector No.
Pin No.
Specifications
Remarks
Humidifier output is ON when heating operation is performed, when thermostat is on, when the fan is on.
∗ The setting of Humidifier provided + Drain pump ON is performed by short-circuit of CN70 or from the
remote controller. (DN [40] = 0001)
1
2
1
DC12V
Humidifier output (∗)
CN66
Output (Open collector)
DC12V
Setting at shipment: Interlock of ON by indoor unit operation, with OFF by stop operation
∗ The single operation setting by FAN button on the remote controller is performed on the remote
controller (DN [31] = 0000 → 0001)
Intilation output
CN32
CN61
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
Output (Open collector)
ON/OFF input
HA ON/OFF input (J01:YES/NO=Pulse (At shipment from factory) /Static input selection)
0V
Remote controller prohibited input
Operation output (Open collector)
DC12V
Permission/Prohibition of remote controller operation stop is performed by input.
Operation ON (Answer back of HA)
HA
Warning output (Open collector)
DC12V
Warning output ON
Defrost output (Open collector)
ON when outdoor unit is defrosted
Thermostat ON output (Open collector) ON when real thermostat is on. (Compressor ON)
Option output
CN60
Cooling output (Open collector)
Heating output (Open collector)
Fan output (Open collector)
DC12V
ON when operation mode is cooling system (COOL, DRY, Cooling/Heating automatic cooling)
ON when operation mode is heating system (HEAT, Cooling/Heating automatic heating)
ON when indoor fan is on. (When air cleaner is used) OFF while clean operation is performed.
Outside error input
CN80
CN20
NC
Generate the warning code “L30” (continuously for 1 minute) and stop the operation forcibly.
Outside error input
DC12V
Panel operation input
Panel up output (Open collector)
Panel down output (Open collector)
0V
The grille is controlled according to up/down operation from the remote controller.
∗ Setting of automatic up/down grille provided is performed on the remote controller.
(DN [30] = 0000 → 0001)
AUTO up/down grille
(∗)
Selection of option error input (Protective operation display of device attached to outside) or Humidifier
setting input (Vaporizing + Drain pump ON)
Humidifier is set at shipment from factory.
1
2
FILTER
Option error /
Humidifier setting (∗)
CN70
0V
0V
∗ Setting of option error input is performed on the remote controller. (DN [2A] = 0002 → 0001)
1
2
1
2
1
2
CHK
Operation check
This check is used to check indoor operation. (Performs operation of indoor fan “H”, Louver horizontal
and Drain pump ON without communication with outdoor and remote controller)
CN71
CN72
CN73
DISP
Exhibition mode
Communication is available by indoor unit and remote controller only.
Indoor unit forced thermostat OFF operation
0V
Demand input
0V
EXCT
Demand
∗ This option is not provided to oversea models.
Serial send LED
D15 (Green)
Sub bus communication LED
D504 (Green)
Micro computer operation LED
D501 (Red)
Optional power supply
CN309 (Yellow), AC230V
Serial receive LED
D14 (Orange)
DC fan return
CN334 (White)
HA (T10)
CN61 (Yellow), DC12V
High ceiling select switch
SW501
DC fan output
CN333 (White)
Remote controller
CN41 (Blue), DC20V
Louver
CN510 (White),
DC12V
Indoor/Outdoor inter-unit cable
CN67 (Black), AC230V
Optional output
CN60 (White), DC12
Humidifier
CN66 (White), DC12V
Fan drive
CN32 (White), DC12V
TC sensor
CN101 (Black), DC5V
TA sensor
CN104 (Yellow), DC5V
TCJ sensor
CN102 (Red), DC5V
Filter
CN70 (White), DC5V
Float switch
CN34 (Red), DC12V
Drain pump
CN504 (White), DC12V
EXCT
CN73 (Red), DC5V
Remote controller power supply LED
D403 (Red)
Automatic up/down grille
CN20 (Blue), DC12V
Main bus communication LED
D503 (Yellow)
CHK
Outside error input
CN80 (Green), DC12V
CN71 (White), DC5V
TCC-LINK adapter
DISP
CN50 (White), DC12V, 5V CN72 (White), DC5V
9. OUTDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
9-1. Outdoor Controls
<In case of RAV-SP56 and SP80 models>
1. PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) control
1) PMV is controlled between (SP56: 20 to 500, SP80: 30 to 500) pulsed during operation.
2) In cooling operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and
TC sensor aiming (SP56: 2 to 5K, SP80: 1 to 4K) as the target value.
3) In heating operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and
TE sensor aiming (SP56: –2 to 4K, SP80: 2 to 4K) as the target value.
4) When the cycle excessively heated in both cooling and heating operation, PMV is controlled by TD sensor.
The target value is 101°C for both cooling and heating operations in SP56, and 91°C for cooling opera-
tion and 96°C for heating operation respectively in SP80.
REQUIREMENT
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the
compressor life.
In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance value or the
refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.
2. Discharge temperature release control
1) When the discharge temperature did not fall or the discharge temperature rapidly went up by PMV
control, this control lowers the operation frequency.
It subdivides the frequency control up to 0.6Hz to stabilize the cycle.
2) When the discharge temperature detected an abnormal stop zone, the compressor stops and then
restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds.
The error counting is cleared when the operation continued for A minutes. If the error is detected by
B times without clearing, the error is determined and restarting is not performed.
∗ The cause is considered as excessively little amount of refrigerant, PMV error or clogging of the cycle.
3) For displayed contents of error, confirm on the check code list.
TD [˚C]
Abnormal stop
(117) 111
Frequency normal down
(107) 109
Frequency slow down
(105) 106
Frequency hold
(102) 103
Frequency slow up
(Up to command)
(93) 96
SP56
SP80
10
As command is
A
B
6
8
SP56 in the parentheses
4
– 57 –
3. Outdoor fan control
Revolution frequency allocation of fan taps [rpm]
W1
200
200
W2
250
230
W3
300
260
W4
400
300
W5
480
340
W6
500
380
W7
520
420
W8
560
460
W9
640
520
WA
670
570
WB
700
600
WC
750
630
WD
800
670
WE
880
710
WF
980
740
SP56
SP80
3-1) Cooling fan control
<SP56>
<SP80>
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO
sensor and the operation frequency. It is controlled
by every 1 tap of DC fan control (15 taps).
The outdoor fan is controlled by TL sensor, TO
sensor and the operation frequency.
The outdoor fan is controlled by every 1 tap of DC
fan control (15 taps).
Only for 60 seconds after start-up of operation, it is
fixed by the maximum fan tap corresponded to the
zone in the following table, and then the fan is
controlled by temperature of TE sensor.
Only for 60 seconds after the operation has
started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the
zone in the following table is fixed and then the fan
is controlled by temperature of TL sensor.
When temperature of TD sensor became high
sufficiently, it is controlled so that the fan revolution
frequency will become higher ignoring TE sensor
temperature.
TE [˚C]
+1 tap / 20 sec
Up to the maximum
revolution frequency of each zone
∗ Operation with W1 in case of fan-OFF
32
TL [˚C]
WF tap
58
55
Revolution frequency hold
+1 tap / 20 sec
Up to the maximum
revolution frequency of each zone
29
–1 tap / 20 sec
Down to the minimum
revolution frequency of each zone
38
35
Revolution frequency hold
TD [˚C]
–1 tap / 20 sec
Down to the minimum
Operation
revolution frequency of each zone
with WF
85
80
Operation with
the maximum tap
of each zone
75
65
Normal fan control
by TE sensor
20 Hz
or lower
20Hz
to 45Hz
45Hz
or higher
20 Hz
or lower
20Hz
to 45Hz
45Hz
or higher
Temp. range
Temp. range
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
W6 WB W7 WE W9 WF
W5 WA W6 WD W8 WE
W3 W7 W4 W9 W6 WB
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
W6 WC W8 WE WA WE
W5 WB W7 WD W9 WD
W4 W8 W6 WA W8 WC
W3 W6 W5 W8 W7 WA
W2 W4 W4 W6 W5 W8
W2 W3 W3 W5 W4 W6
OFF OFF OFF W2 OFF W3
OFF WC OFF WE OFF WE
38°C ≤ TO
38°C ≤ TO
28°C ≤ TO < 38°C
29°C ≤ TO < 38°C
15°C ≤ TO < 29°C
5°C ≤ TO < 15°C
0°C ≤ TO < 5°C
–4°C ≤ TO < 0°C
TO < –4°C
15°C ≤ TO < 28°C
5.5°C ≤ TO < 15°C W2 W5 W3 W7 W5 W9
0°C ≤ TO < 5.5°C
–5°C ≤ TO < 0°C
TO < –5°C
W1 W3 W2 W5 W3 W7
W1 W2 W1 W3 W2 W4
OFF OFF OFF OFF W1 W3
W1 WB W1 WE W1 WF
TO error
TO error
– 58 –
3-2) Heating fan control
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.
(Control from minimum W1 to maximum (according to the following table))
For 3 minutes after the operation has started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the zone in
the following table is fixed and then the fan is controlled by temperature of TE sensor.
When TE ≥ 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the
compressor stops.
TE [˚C]
It is the same status as the normal THERMO
OFF without error display.
–2 taps / 20 sec. (Down to W1)
Stop timer count
The compressor restarts after approx. 2 minutes
30 seconds and this intermittent operation is not
abnormal.
24
21
18
15
–2 taps / 20 sec. (Down to W1)
–1 tap / 20 sec. (Down to W1)
Revolution frequency hold
In case that the status in item
generates
frequently, stain on filter of the suction part of
the indoor unit is considered.
Clean the filter and then restart the operation.
+1 tap / 20 sec
(Up to the maximum tap of each zone)
<SP56>
<SP80>
20 Hz
or lower
20Hz
to 45Hz
45Hz
or higher
20 Hz
or lower
20Hz
to 45Hz
45Hz
or higher
Temp. range
Temp. range
Max.
W7
Max.
W8
Max.
W9
Max.
W7
Max.
W8
Max.
W9
10°C ≤ TO
5.5°C ≤ TO < 10°C
–5°C ≤ TO < 5.5°C
TO < –5°C
10°C ≤ TO
WA
WD
WE
WE
WC
WE
WF
WF
WE
WF
WF
WF
5°C ≤ TO < 10°C
–3°C ≤ TO < 5°C
W9
WB
WD
WE
WF
WF
WD
WE
WE
WF
WF
WD
WE
WF
WF
–10°C ≤ TO < –3°C
TO < –10°C
TO error
TO error
4. Coil heating control
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case heater.
It purposes to prevent stagnation of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation;
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused.
As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn on power of the compressor beforehand when starting
operation after power of the compressor has been interrupted and left as it is for a long time.
3) SP80 judgment for electricity is performed by TD and TO sensors.
If TO sensor is defective, a backup control is automatically performed by TE sensor.
For a case of defective TO sensor, judge it with outdoor LED display.
Using TD sensor and TE sensor, SP56 judges the power-on.
4) For every model, the power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.
– 59 –
<SP56>
• Power-ON condition TD < 30˚C
TE [˚C]
(Normal time)
0
–1
–6
–7
No power
REQUIREMENT
Continuous power-ON
Output [10W or equivalent]
In some cases, the sound of power-ON may be
heard. It is not abnormal.
Continuous power-ON
Output [20W or equivalent]
<SP80>
• Power-ON condition TD < 30˚C
• Power-ON condition TD < 30˚C
(Normal time)
(In defective TO sensor)
TO
TE
18˚C
20˚C
No power
No power
15˚C
10˚C
8˚C
18˚C
Intermittent power-ON
10 minutes: ON /
Intermittent power-ON
10 minutes: ON /
12˚C
5 minutes: OFF
5 minutes: OFF
Output [40W or equivalent]
Output [40W or equivalent]
10˚C
Continuous power-ON
Output [40W or equivalent]
Continuous power-ON
Output [40W or equivalent]
REQUIREMENT
While heating the coil, the power sound may be heard. However it is not a trouble.
5. Short intermittent operation preventive control
1) For 3 to 10 minutes after operation start, in some cases, the compressor does not stop to protect the
compressor even if receiving the THERMO OFF signal from indoor.
However it is not abnormal status. (The operation continuance differs according to the operation status.)
2) When the operation stops by the remote controller, the operation does not continue.
6. Current release control
No. of revolutions of the compressor is controlled by AC current value detected by the outdoor P.C. board so
that the input current of the inverter does not exceed the specified value.
Current [A]
Frequency down
SP56
COOL
10.80
SP80
COOL
16.0
Model
1
HEAT
HEAT
Hold
Hold
I1 value [A]
13.05
20.0
1–1.0
Normal operation
– 60 –
7. Current release value shift control
1) This control purposes to prevent troubles of
the electronic parts such as the compressor
driving elements and the compressor during
cooling operation.
Current release control value (I1)
[A]
Temperature range
SP56
7.80
7.80
9.30
10.80
7.80
SP80
2) The current release control value (I1) is
selected from the following table according to
TO sensor value.
50°C ≤ TO
45°C ≤ TO < 50°C
39°C ≤ TO < 45°C
TO < 39°C
9.5
9.5
13.0
16.0
9.5
TO error
8. Over-current protective control
1) When the over-current protective circuit detected an abnormal current, stop the compressor.
2) The compressor restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds as setting [1] as an error count.
3) When the error count [8] was found, determine an error and restart operation is not performed.
4) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.
9. High-pressure release control <SP80 only>
1) The operation frequency is controlled to restrain abnormal rising of high pressure by TL sensor in
cooling operation and TC sensor in heating operation.
2) When TL sensor in cooling operation or TC sensor in heating operation detects abnormal temperature of
the stop zone, stop the compressor and the error count becomes +1.
3) When the compressor stopped with 2), the operation restarts from the point of the normal operation
zone (e point or lower) where it returned after 2 minutes 30 seconds.
4) The error count when the compressor stopped with 2) is cleared after the operation continued for
10 minutes.
If the error count becomes [10] without clearing, the error is determined and reactivation is not performed.
5) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.
HEAT TC / COOL TL
HEAT
TC
COOL
TL
[˚C]
Abnormal stop
Frequency normal down
Frequency slow down
Frequency hold
a
a
b
c
d
e
61°C
56°C
54°C
52°C
48°C
63°C
62°C
60°C
58°C
54°C
b
c
d
e
Frequency slow up (Up to command)
As command is
– 61 –
10. Defrost control
<SP56 only>
1) In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor satisfies any condition in A zone to D
zone.
2) During defrosting operation, it finishes if TE sensor continued 12°C or continued 5°C £ TE < 12°C for
80 seconds. The defrost operation also finishes when it continued for 15 minutes even if TE sensor tem-
perature was 5°C or lower.
3) After defrost operation was reset, the compressor stopped for approx. 40 seconds and then the heating
operation starts.
Start of heating operation
TE [˚C]
[min.]
0
10 15
29 35
91
–4
–6
A zone
–10
B zone
D zone
–25
C zone
∗
∗ The minimum TE value and To value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started are
stored in memory as TE0 and To0, respectively.
In normal To
In abnormal To
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) ≥ 3°C
When status (TE0 – TE) ≥ 3°C
A zone
B zone
continued for 20 seconds
continued for 20 seconds
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) ≥ 2.5°C
When status (TE0 – TE) ≥ 2.5°C
continued for 20 seconds
continued for 20 seconds
C zone
D zone
When the status (TE ≤ –26°C) continued for 20 seconds
When the status (TE ≤ –10°C) continued for 20 seconds
– 62 –
<SP80 only>
1) In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor satisfies any condition in A zone to D
zone.
2) During defrosting operation, it finishes if TE sensor continued 12°C or higher for 3 seconds or continued
7°C ≤ TE < 12°C for 1 minute. The defrost operation also finishes when it continued for 10 minutes even if
TE sensor temperature was 7°C or lower.
3) After defrost operation was reset, the compressor stopped for approx. 40 seconds and then the heating
operation starts.
Start of heating operation
TE [˚C]
[min.]
0
10
15
39
45
55
d
–2
–5
A zone
–10
D zone
B zone
–25
C zone
∗
∗ The minimum TE value and To value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started are
stored in memory as TE0 and To0, respectively.
In normal To
In abnormal To
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) ≥ 3°C
When status (TE0 – TE) ≥ 3°C
A zone
B zone
continued for 20 seconds
continued for 20 seconds
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) ≥ 2°C
When status (TE0 – TE) ≥ 2°C
continued for 20 seconds
continued for 20 seconds
C zone
D zone
When the status (TE ≤ –25°C) continued for 20 seconds
When compressor operation status of TE < –2°C is calculated as d minutes
4) The time of above d can be changed by
exchanging jumper [J805] and [J806] of the
outdoor control P.C. board.
J805
J806
d
150 minutes
Setting at shipment
¡
¡
(Setting at shipment: 150 minutes)
90 minutes
60 minutes
30 minutes
¡
×
×
×
¡
×
: Short circuit, : Open
¡
×
11. Compressor protective control <SP80 only>
1) This control purposes to raise the operation frequency until 45Hz for 2 minutes in order to protect the
compressor (Prevention of oil accumulation in the refrigerating cycle) when the status that the operation
frequency is 45Hz or less has continued for 10 hours was calculated. The operation frequency follows
the normal indoor command after controlling.
2) Although the compressor may stop by THERMO-OFF control when the room temperature varies and
then attains the set temperature by this control, it is not abnormal.
3) During this control works, if stopping the operation by the remote controller, the operation does not continue.
– 63 –
<In case of RAV-SP40 and SP45 models>
1. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) control
1) For PMV with 50 to 500 pulses during operation, respectively.
2) In cooling operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TC sensor.
3) In heating operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TE sensor.
4) For the temperature difference in items 2) and 3), 1 to 5K is aimed as the target in both cooling and
heating operations.
5) When the cycle excessively rose in both cooling and heating operations, PMV is controlled by TD sensor.
The aimed value is usually 106°C in both cooling and heating operations.
REQUIREMENT
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the
compressor life. In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance
value an the refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.
2. Discharge temperature release control
1) This function controls the operation
frequency, that is, lowers the operation
TD [˚C]
frequency when the discharge temperature
has not lower or the discharge temperature
has rapidly risen during PMV control.
Error stop
(“P03” display with 8 times error count)
It subdivides the frequency control up to a
unit of 0.6 Hz to stabilize the cycle.
2) When the discharge temperature is detected
in an abnormal stop zone, the unit stops the
compressor and restarts after 2 minutes
30 seconds.
117
Frequency down
107
103
100
93
Frequency slow-down
Frequency holding
The error counter is cleared when it has
continued the operation for 6 minutes.
Frequency slow-up
(Up to command)
If the abnormal stop zone has been detected
by 8 times without clearing of counter, an
error “P03” is displayed.
∗ The cause is considered as excessively
little amount of refrigerant, defective PMV,
or clogging of cycle.
As command is
3. Current release control
Current [A]
The output frequency and the output voltage are
controlled by AC current value detected by T02
on the outdoor P.C. board so that input current of
the inverter does not exceed the specified value.
Frequency down
I1
Hold
SP40, SP45
Hold
Normal operation
I1–0.5
Objective model
COOL
HEAT
I1 value [A]
10.13
10.50
– 64 –
4. Outdoor fan control
Allocations of fan tap revolutions [rpm]
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
WA
WB WC WD
WE
WF
SP40, SP45
200 300 350 410 480 500 560 640 670 700 750 800 800 840 840
1) Cooling fan control
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE, TD, and TO sensors and also revolution frequency of the operation.
The outdoor is controlled by every 1 tap of DC fan control (15 taps).
Only during 60 seconds after the operation has started, the fan is fixed with the maximum fan tap
which corresponds to the zone in the following table.
After then the fan is controlled by TE sensor temperature.
Considering a case that TE sensor has come out of the holder, the fan is controlled so that revolution
frequency of the fan increases regardless of TE if temperature of TD sensor has risen.
Operation with WE
TE [˚C]
TD [˚C]
“WF”
+1 tap/20 seconds
rpm hold
85
80
75
65
32
29
Operation with
maximum tap in
each zone
–1 tap/20 seconds
Usual fan control
f < 34.1Hz
Min.
34.1Hz ≤ f < 58.6Hz
58.6Hz ≤ f
Temp. range
Max.
WB
WA
W7
W5
W3
W2
Min.
W8
W7
W5
W4
W3
W2
OFF
W1
Max.
WD
WC
W9
W7
W5
W4
W3
WF
Min.
Max.
WF
WF
WB
W9
W7
W5
W4
WF
38°C ≤ TO
W6
W5
W3
W2
W1
W1
WA
W9
W7
W6
W4
W3
W1
W1
32 ≤ TO < 38°C
15 ≤ TO < 32°C
5 ≤ TO < 15°C
1 ≤ TO < 5°C
–5 ≤ TO < 1°C
TO < –5°C
OFF
TO error
W1
WF
– 65 –
2) Heating fan control
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.
(From Min. W1 to Max. are controlled according to the following table.)
During 3 minutes after start-up, the fan is fixed
with the maximum fan tap corresponding to zone
in the following table.
TE [˚C]
After then the fan is controlled by temperature of
TE sensor.
–2 tap/20 seconds
STOP timer count
24
If status, TE > 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the
–2 tap/20 seconds
–1 tap/20 seconds
rpm hold
operation stops.
21
This status is same to the usual Thermo-OFF
which has no alarm display, and the fan restarts
after 2 minutes and 30 seconds.
18
This intermittent operation is not abnormal.
15
When the above status
occurs frequently, it is
+1 tap/20 seconds
considered that the filter of suction part of the
indoor unit is stain.
Clean the filter and then restart the operation.
Temp. range
10°C ≤ TO
f < 38.9Hz
38.9Hz ≤ f < 67.6Hz
67.6Hz ≤ f
W7
WA
WE
WE
WE
W8
WB
WF
WF
WF
W9
WD
WF
WF
WF
5 ≤ TO < 10°C
–5 ≤ TO < 5°C
TO < –5°C
Maximum
TO error
5. Coil heating control
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case heater.
It purposes to prevent slackness of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation,
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused.
As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn on power of the compressor beforehand when starting
operation after power of the compressor has been interrupted for a long time.
3) Coil heating is controlled by TD and TE sensor.
4) The power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.
TE [˚C]
No power-ON
0
SP40, SP45
–1
Continuous ON (L)
–6
–7
L
10W and equivalent
30W and equivalent
H
Continuous ON (H)
– 66 –
6. Defrost control
In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor temperature satisfies any condition
in A zone to C zone.
The defrost operation is immediately finished if TE sensor temperature has become 12°C or more, or it
also is finished when condition of 5°C < TE < 12°C has continued for 80 seconds.
The defrost operation is also finished when defrost operation has continued for 15 minutes even if TE
sensor temperature has become 5°C or lower.
After defrost operation has finished, the compressor and the outdoor fan start heating operation after
stopped for approx. 40 seconds.
Start of heating operation
0
10
15
29
35
[min.]
TE [˚C]
–4
A zone
–6
–10
D zone
B zone
C zone
–25
*
∗ The minimum TE value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started is stored in memory
as TE0.
A zone
B zone
C zone
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE > 2.5 continued for 20 seconds.
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE > 3 continued for 20 seconds.
Defrost operation is performed when this zone continued for 20 seconds.
– 67 –
F01, 02, 25A fuse
Lead wire for grounding
(Black)
DB02:
High power factor diode
Q404:
High power factor circuit IGBT
C12, 13, 14
electrrolytiic capaacitor
F03: 3.15A fuse
DB01:
Single-phase rectifier diode
L-phase power supply lead
(Black)
N-phase power supply lead
(White)
Serial lead (Orange)
Reactor lead connector
(White)
CN701:
4-way valve connector
RY701:
4-way valve relay
CN300:
Fan motor connector
CN602:
Outdoor temperature
(TO) sensor connector
12V
5V
GND
CN806:
Optional connector
CN600:
Heat exchange temperature
(TE) sensor connector
IC800: MCU
CN603:
Suction temperature
(TS) sensor connector
Comp. lead
(Red) (White) (Black)
CN601:
Discharge temperature
(TD) sensor connector
CN500:
Fan drive circuit
Case thermo
Q300 to Q305:
connector
FET (QTY: 6P)
Comp. drive circuit
Q200 to Q205: IGBT (QTY: 6P)
IC200: Drive IC (QTY: 1P)
CN700:
PMV connector
CN605:
Sub SW board connector
J800 to 803, 806
Model switch jumper line
RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
<MCC-1571>
Fan motor output
CN300 (White)
Compressor output terminals
CN202
CN201
CN200
Power circuit protective fuse
F100 (250V, 3.15A plastic case)
4-way valve connector
CN701 (White)
Electrolytic capacitors
Case thermo connector
CN609 (Blue)
Compressor ON
output connector
CN704 (Blue)
Heater output connector
CN703 (Gray)
Reactor connecting
connectors
Optional input connector
CN610 (Yellow)
Specific operation SW
SW801
SW804
Lead wire for grounding
P09 (Black)
Display exchange SW
SW800
SW803
Power supply protective fuse
F01 (250V, 25A)
Temp. sensor connector
Power supply connecting lead wire
P01 (Red)
P02 (White)
TL CN604 (White)
TD CN603 (White)
TO CN602 (Yellow)
TE CN601 (White)
TS CN600 (White)
Power, Alarm display LED
D800 to 804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
Initial set SW
SW802
PMV connector
CN710 (White)
Inter-unit wire connector
CN04 (White)
4-way valve protective fuse
F700 (250V, 3.15A, plastic case)
Inter-unit wire protective fuse
F03 (250V, 10A)
Indoor/Outdoor communication signal LED
D503 (Green, Outdoor → Indoor)
D502 (Orange, Indoor → Outdoor)
– 69 –
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting
<Wired remote controller type>
1. Before troubleshooting
1) Required tools/instruments
+
–
•
and
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, push pins for reset switch
• Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.
2) Confirmation points before check
a) The following operations are normal.
1. Compressor does not operate.
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup
temperature?
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?
3. Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?
• Is not defrost operation performed?
4. ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?
• Is not automatic address being set up?
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the
operation cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?
b) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?
c) Are connecting cables of indoor unit and remote controller correct?
2. Troubleshooting procedure
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.
→
→
Trouble
Confirmation of check code display
Check defective position and parts.
NOTE :
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to outer
noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cables of the
remote controller to shield cables.
– 70 –
<Wireless remote controller type>
1. Before troubleshooting
1) Required tools/instruments
+
–
•
and
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, etc.
• Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.
2) Confirmation points before check
a) The following operations are normal.
1. Compressor does not operate.
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup
temperature?
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?
3) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?
• Is not defrost operation performed?
4) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.
• Is not forced operation performed?
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?
• Is not automatic address being set up?
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?
a) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?
b) Are connecting cables between indoor unit and receiving unit correct?
2. Troubleshooting procedure
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the operation
cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.
Confirmation of lamp display
Check defective
→
→
(When 4-way air discharge cassette type
wireless remote controller is connected)
Trouble
position and parts.
1) Outline of judgment
The primary judgment to check where a trouble occurred in indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed with
the following method.
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of indoor unit
(sensors of the receiving unit)
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of
self-diagnosis are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.
– 71 –
10-2. Troubleshooting
10-2-1. Outline of judgment
The primary judgment to check whether a trouble occurred in the indoor unit or outdoor unit is carried out with
the following method.
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of the indoor unit
(sensors of the receiving part)
The indoor unit monitors the operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.
: Go off,
: Go on,
: Flash (0.5 sec.)
Lamp indication
Check code
Cause of trouble occurrence
Operation Timer Ready
—
Power supply OFF or miswiring between receiving unit and indoor unit
No indication at all
E01
E02
E03
E08
E09
E10
Receiving error
Receiving unit
Miswiring or wire connection error
Sending error
between receiving unit and indoor unit
Communication stop
Operation Timer Ready
Flash
Duplicated indoor unit No.
Setup error
Duplicated master units of remote controller
Communication error between CPUs on indoor unit P.C. board
Wire connection error between indoor units, Indoor power OFF
(Communication stop between indoor master and follower or between main
and sub indoor twin)
E18
E04
Operation Timer Ready
Miswiring between indoor unit and outdoor unit or connection erorr
(Communication stop between indoor and outdoor units)
Flash
Operation Timer Ready
P10
P12
Overflow was detected.
Protective device of indoor unit worked.
Indoor DC fan error
Alternate flash
P03
P04
P05
P07
P15
P19
P20
P22
P26
P29
Outdoor unit discharge temp. error
Outdoor high pressure system error
Protective device of
outdoor unit worked.
∗1
Power supply voltage error
Heat sink overheat error
Gas leak detection error
Outdoor unit error
Operation Timer Ready
Alternate flash
4-way valve system error (Indoor or outdoor unit judged.)
Outdoor unit high pressure protection
Outdoor fan system error
Protective device of
outdoor unit worked.
Short-circuit error of compressor driving device
Position detection circuit error
∗1
Stopped because of error of other indoor unit in a group
(Check codes of E03/L03/L07/L08)
P31
∗1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.
– 72 –
Lamp indication
Check code
Cause of trouble occurrence
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error
Operation Timer Ready
F01
F02
P10
Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error
Heat exchanger sensor (TA) error
Indoor unit sensor error
Alternate flash
F04
F06
F07
F08
F12
F13
F15
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Temp. sensor (TE) error
Operation Timer Ready
Alternate flash
Temp. sensor (TL) error
Temp. sensor (TO) error
Sensor error of outdoor unit
∗1
Temp. sensor (TS) error
Temp. sensor (TH) error
Temp. Sensor miswiring (TE, TS)
Operation Timer Ready
F29
F31
Indoor EEPROM error
Outdoor EEPROM error
Simultaneous flash
Operation Timer Ready
Simultaneous flash
H01
H02
H03
H04
L03
L07
L08
L09
Compressor break down
Compressor lock
Operation Timer Ready
Outdoor compressor system error ∗1
Current detection circuit error
Case thermostat worked.
Flash
Duplicated master indoor units
There is indoor unit of group connection → AUTO address
Operation Timer Ready
in individual indoor unit.
∗ If group construction and
Unsetting of group address
Missed setting
(Unset indoor capacity)
address are not normal
when power supply turned on,
automatically goes to address
setup mode.
Simultaneous flash
L10
L20
L29
L30
Operation Timer Ready
Unset model type (Service board)
Duplicated indoor central addresses
Others
Other error of outdoor unit
Outside interlock error
Simultaneous flash
∗1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.
– 73 –
10-2-2. Others (Other than Check Code)
Lamp indication
Check code
Cause of trouble occurrence
Operation Timer Ready
—
During test run
Simultaneous flash
Operation Timer Ready
Disagreement of cool/heat
(Automatic cool/heat setting to automatic cool/heat prohibited model, or
setting of heating to cooling-only model)
—
Alternate flash
– 74 –
10-2-3. Check Code List (Indoor)
: Go on,
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
(Indoor unit detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Block indication
Air conditioner operation
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
TCC-LINK central &
Wired remote controller
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Operation Timer Ready Flash
Regular communication error between indoor and
remote controller
No communication from remote controller and network adapter
(Also no communication from central control system)
E03
¥
¡
×
l
l
E04
E08
E10
Indoor/Outdoor serial error
There is error on serial communication between indoor and outdoor units
Same address as yours was detected.
¥
l
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
l
¥
¥
l
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses
²
Communication error between indoor MCU
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer
Regular communication error between
indoor master and follower units
Regular communication between indoor master and follower units is impossible,
Communication between twin master (main) and follower (sub) units is impossible.
E18
¥
¡
×
l
l
F01
F02
F10
F29
L03
L07
L08
L09
L20
L30
P01
P10
P12
P19
P31
ALT
ALT
ALT
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TCJ) error
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TC) error
Indoor unit, Room temp. sensor (TA) error
Indoor unit, other indoor P.C. board error
Duplicated setting of indoor group master unit
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.
Unset indoor group address
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TCJ).
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TC).
Open/short was detected on room temp. sensor (TA).
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.
There are multiple master units in a group.
²
²
²
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit.
Indoor group address is unset.
Unset indoor capacity
Capacity of indoor unit is unset.
Duplicated central control system address
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)
Indoor unit, AC fan error
Duplicated setting of central control system address
Abnormal stop by outside error (CN80) input
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
An error of indoor AC fan was detected. (Fan motor thermal relay worked.)
Float switch worked.
Indoor unit, overflow detection
Indoor unit, DC fan error
Indoor DC fan error (Over-current/Lock, etc.) was detected.
In heating operation, an error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger sensor.
Follower unit in group cannot operate by warning from [E03/L03/L07/L08] of master unit.
4-way valve system error
Other indoor unit error
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.
²
(Remote controller detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Block indication
Air conditioner operation
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Wired remote controller
Operation Timer Ready Flash
No master remote controller, Remote controller
communication (Receive) error
Signal cannot be received from indoor unit. Master remote controller was not set.
(including 2 remote controllers)
E01
E02
E09
—
—
×
—
—
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Remote controller communication (Send) error
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.
¥
¥
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master. (Indoor master unit stops warning
and follower unit continues operation.)
Duplicated master remote controller
(Central control devices detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Block indication
Air conditioner operation
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
TCC-LINK central
Operation Timer Ready Flash
Signal sending operation of central control system is impossible.
There are multiple same central devices. (AI-NET)
Is not displayed.
(Common use of
C05
C06
C12
—
—
—
—
—
—
Central control system communication (send) error
Central control system communication (receive) error
General-purpose device control interface batched warning
remote controller, etc.)
Signal receiving operation of central control system is impossible.
An error on device connected to general-purpose device control interface of exclusive to
TCC-LINK/AI-NET
—
By warning unit
(Above-mentioned)
Group follower unit is defective.
(For remote controller, above-mentioned [∗∗∗] details are displayed with unit No.
P30
—
—
Group follower unit is defective.
NOTE: Even for the same contents of error such as communication error, the display of check code may differ according to detection device.
When remote controller or central controller detects an error, it is not necessarily related to operation of the air conditioner. In this list, the check codes that outdoor unit detects are not described.
Check Code List (Outdoor)
: Go on,
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
Sensor lamp part
Remote
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
controller
indication
Block indication
Operation Timer Ready Flash
ALT
Representative defective position
Detection
Explanation of error contents
Open/Short of discharge temp. sensor was detected.
F04
F06
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TE, TS, TL) error
Outdoor
Outdoor
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.
Miswiring between TE sensor and TS sensor
ALT
F08
F07
F12
F13
F15
F31
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
SIM
Outdoor unit Outside temp. sensor (TO) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TL) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TS) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TH) error
Outdoor unit Misconnection of temp. sensor (TE, TS)
Outdoor unit EEPROM error
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Open/Short of outside temp. sensor was detected.
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.
Open/Short of suction temp. sensor was detected.
Open/Short of heat sink temp. sensor (Board installed) was detected.
Misconnection of outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor and suction temp. sensor was detected.
Outdoor P.C. board part (EEPROM) error was detected.
When reached min-Hz by current release control, short-circuited current (Idc) after
DC excitation was detected.
H01
Outdoor unit Compressor break down
×
×
¥
l
l
H02
H03
H04
L10
Outdoor unit Compressor lock
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Compressor lock was detected.
¥
¥
¥
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
l
l
l
¥
l
l
l
¥
Outdoor unit Current detection circuit error
Outdoor unit Case thermostat operation
Outdoor unit Setting error of service P.C. board type
Current detection circuit error
Case thermostat operation was detected.
SIM
SIM
When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type select jumper setting was inappropriate.
1) Defective parts on outdoor P.C. board (MCU communication, EEPROM, TH sensor error)
2) When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type selection was inappropriate.
3) Other error (Heat sink abnormal overheat, gas leak, 4-way valve inverse error) was detected.
L29
Outdoor unit Other outdoor unit error
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. error
Outdoor
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¡
¥
P03
P04
ALT
ALT
Outdoor
Outdoor
Error was detected by discharge temp. release control.
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
Outdoor unit
When case thermostat worked, error was detected by high release control from indoor/
outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor. Power supply voltage error
High pressure system error, Power supply voltage error
P05
P07
P15
P20
P22
P26
P29
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Power supply error
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Power supply voltage error
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Outdoor unit Heat sink overheat
Gas leak detection
Abnormal overheat was detected by outdoor heat sink temp. sensor.
Abnormal overheat of discharge temp. or suction temp. was detected.
Error was detected by high release control from indoor/outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor.
Error (Over-current, lock, etc.) was detected on outdoor fan drive circuit.
Short-circuited protective operation of compressor drive circuit element (G-Tr /IGBT) worked.
Position detection error of compressor motor was detected.
Outdoor unit High pressure system error
Outdoor unit Outdoor fan error
Outdoor unit Inverter Idc operation
Outdoor unit Position detection error
No remote controller master unit
Remote controller communication error
Remote
controller
Signal was not received from indoor unit.
Main remote controller was not set. (including 2 remote controllers)
E01
E02
E03
—
—
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
Remote
controller
Remote controller send error
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.
—
—
Regular communication error between indoor and
remote controller
Indoor
No communication from remote controller and network adapter
¡
×
×
l
¥
l
E04
E08
Indoor/Outdoor serial error
Indoor
Indoor
Serial communication error between indoor and outdoor
Same address as yours was detected.
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses
²
Remote
controller
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master.
(Indoor master unit stops warning and follower unit continues operation.)
E09
E10
E18
Duplicated main remote controllers
Communication error between CPU
×
¡
¡
×
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Indoor
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer
Regular communication error between master and
follower indoor units
Regular communication was impossible between master and follower indoor units.
Communication between twin master (Main unit) and follower (sub unit) was impossible.
Indoor
×
L03
L07
L08
L09
L30
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
Duplicated indoor master units
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
There are multiple master units in a group.
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit
Indoor address group was unset.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
²
²
²
l
l
l
l
¡
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.
Unset indoor group address
Unset indoor capacity
Capacity of indoor unit was unset.
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)
Abnormal stop by CN80 outside error input
Indoor
Outdoor
P19
ALT
4-way valve inverse error
In heating operation, error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger or temp. up ofTE, TS.
¡
×
¥
¥
l
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.
²
: Go on,
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
Sensor lamp part
Block indication
Remote
controller
indication
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Representative defective position
Detection
Explanation of error contents
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TCJ) was detected.
Operation Timer Ready Flash
ALT
F01
F02
F10
F29
P01
P10
P12
P31
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error
Indoor unit Room temp. sensor (TA) error
Indoor unit Other indoor P.C. board error
Indoor unit Indoor fan error
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
ALT
ALT
SIM
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TC) was detected.
Open/Short of room temp. (TA) was detected.
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.
Indoor AC fan error was detected. (Fan thermal relay worked.)
Float switch worked.
Indoor unit Overflow detection
Indoor unit Indoor fan error
Indoor fan error (Over-current / Lock, etc.) was detected.
Other indoor under condition of warning in group. E03/L07/L03/L08 warning
Other indoor unit error
Sub remote controller error in a group
(Details of remote controller are displayed with unit No. Only central control side is displayed.)
—
—
—
—
By unit with warning No.
ALT
Error in indoor group
Network adapter
Network adapter/
Center
Communication error of central control system signal
∗ Is not displayed on the remote controller
—
LAN system communication error
¡
¡
Network adapter/
Center
L20
—
SIM
LAN system communication error
Duplicated indoor address of central control system communication
¥
¡
¥
¡
¡
×
¡
—
There are multiple communication adapters.
Network adapter
There are multiple communication adapters on remote controller communication line.
Error mode detected by indoor unit
Operation of diagnostic function
Judgment and measures
Check
code
Status of
air conditioner
Cause of operation
Condition
1. Check cables of remote controller and communication adapters.
• Remote controller LCD display OFF (Disconnection)
• Central remote controller [97] check code
No communication from remote
controller (including wireless) and
communication adapter
Stop
Displayed when
E03
(Automatic reset) error is detected
The serial signal is not output from
outdoor unit to indoor unit.
1. Outdoor unit does not completely operate.
• Inter-unit wire check, correction of miswiring
• Check outdoor P.C. board. Correct wiring of P.C. board.
• Miswiring of inter-unit wire
Stop
Displayed when
E04
• Defective serial sending circuit on
outdoor P.C. board
(Automatic reset) error is detected
2. When outdoor unit normally operates
Check P.C. board (Indoor receiving / Outdoor sending).
• Defective serial receiving circuit on
indoor P.C. board
E08
L03
Duplicated indoor unit address
Duplicated indoor master unit
1. Check whether remote controller connection (Group/Individual)
was changed or not after power supply turned on
(Finish of group construction/Address check).
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ If group construction and address are not normal when the
power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts to
address setup mode. (Resetting of address)
Stop
There is group wire in individual indoor
unit.
L07
L08
L09
Unset indoor group address
Unset indoor capacity
Displayed when 1. Set indoor capacity (DN=11)
error is detected
Stop
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.
L30
P10
Abnormal input of outside interlock
error is detected
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Trouble of drain pump
Float switch operation
Displayed when 2. Clogging of drain pump
Stop
• Float circuit, Disconnection,
Coming-off, Float switch contact error
error is detected
3. Check float switch.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Position detection error
Displayed when 2. Over-current protective circuit of indoor fan driving unit operated.
P12
P19
Indoor DC fan error
Stop
Stop
error is detected
3. Indoor fan locked.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Check 4-way valve.
4-way valve system error
Displayed when 2. Check 2-way valve and check valve.
• After heating operation has started,
indoor heat exchangers temp. is
down.
(Automatic reset) error is detected
3. Check indoor heat exchanger (TC/TCJ).
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
1. Judge follower unit while master unit is [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08].
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Own unit stops while warning is output
to other indoor units.
Displayed when
(Follower unit)
error is detected
(Automatic reset)
P31
F01
F02
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TCJ)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TCJ).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TC)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TC).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TA)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TA).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
F10
F29
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Indoor EEPROM error
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)
(Automatic reset) error is detected
• EEPROM access error
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Communication error between indoor
MCU
1. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
E10
E18
(Automatic reset) error is detected
• Communication error between fan
driving MCU and main MCU
1. Check remote controller wiring.
2. Check indoor power supply wiring.
3. Check indoor P.C. board.
Regular communication error between
indoor aster and follower units and
between main and sub units
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
– 78 –
Error mode detected by remote controller or central controller (TCC-LINK)
Operation of diagnostic function
Judgment and measures
Status of
air conditioner
Check code
Cause of operation
Condition
Power supply error of remote controller, Indoor
EEPROM error
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.
2. Check remote controller.
No communication with master indoor unit
• Remote controller wiring is not correct.
• Power of indoor unit is not turned on.
• Automatic address cannot be completed.
Not displayed at all
(Operation on
remote controller
is impossible.)
3. Check indoor power wiring.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
—
5. Check indoor EEPROM.
(including socket insertion)
→ Automatic address repeating phenom-
enon generates.
Receiving error from remote controller
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.
2. Check remote controller.
No communication with master indoor unit
Stop
(Automatic reset)
E01
• Disconnection of inter-unit wire between
remote controller and master indoor unit
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ If center exists,
∗2
3. Check indoor power wiring.
operation continues.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Sending error of remote controller
(Automatic reset)
Signal send error to indoor unit
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when 1. Check sending circuit inside of remote
E02
∗ If center exists,
error is detected
controller.
operation continues.
→ Replace remote controller.
1. In 2-remote controllers (including wireless),
there are multiple main units.
Stop
(Sub unit
continues operation.)
There are multiple main remote controllers.
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when
error is detected
E09
L20
Check that there are 1 main remote
controller and other sub remote controllers.
1. Check setting of central control system
network address. (Network adapter SW01)
Duplicated indoor central addresses on
communication of central control system
(Detected by indoor/central controller side)
Stop
(Automatic reset)
Displayed when
error is detected
Central controller
L20
2. Check network adapter P.C. board.
—
1. Check communication wire / miswiring
2. Check communication (U3, U4 terminals)
3. Check network adapter P.C. board.
∗3
Communication circuit error of central
control system
(Detected by central controller side)
Continues
Displayed when
Central controller
(Send)
4. Check central controller (such as central
control remote controller, etc.)
(By remote controller) error is detected
C05
(Receive)
C06
5. Check terminal resistance. (TCC-LINK)
—
Continuation/Stop
(According
to each case)
Indoor Gr sub unit error
(Detected by central controller side)
Displayed when Check the check code of the corresponding
error is detected unit from remote controller.
Central controller
P30
∗2 The check code cannot be displayed by the wired remote controller.
(Usual operation of air conditioner becomes unavailable.)
For the wireless models, an error is notified with indication lamp.
∗3 This trouble is related to communication of remote controller (A, B), central system (TCC-LINK U3, U4), and
[E01], [E02], [E03], [E09] or [E18] is displayed or no check display on the remote controller according to the
contents.
– 79 –
Error mode detected by outdoor unit
The check code has been ramified from “4 series” and after.
The ramified check code is displayed only when both the indoor unit and the outdoor unit are “4 series” and after.
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM804UT-E with RAV-SP804AT-E)
When the indoor unit is 3 series and before, the conventional check code is displayed.
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM802BT-E and RAV-SP804AT-E: Outdoor unit only is “4 series”.)
Operation of diagnostic function
Check code
Judgment and measures
Indoor unit
Status of
air conditioner
Cause of operation
Condition
before
after
3 series 4 series
1. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short-circuit of
discharge temp. sensor (TD)
Displayed when
error is detected
F04
F06
F04
F06
F07
F12
F15
F08
Stop
Stop
1. Check temp. sensor (TE).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, or short-circuit of
outdoor temp. sensor (TE)
Displayed when
error is detected
1. Check temp. sensor (TL).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, or short-circuit of
outdoor temp. sensor (TL)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
1. Check suction temp. sensor (TS).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, or short-circuit of
suction temp. sensor (TS)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
1. Check temp. sensor (TE, TS).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Miss-mounting of outdoor temp.
sensor (TE, TS)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
1. Check outside temp. sensor (TO).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, or short-circuit of
outside temp. sensor (TO)
Displayed when
error is detected
F08
L29
Continue
Disconnection, or short-circuit of heat
sink temp. sensor (TH)
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.
error is detected
F13
F31
L10
L29
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.
error is detected
Outdoor P.C. EEPROM error
Displayed when 1. Outdoor service P.C. board
Incorrect setting of service P.C. board
error is detected
Check model type setting jumper wire.
Communication error between MCUs
on outdoor P.C. board
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.
error is detected
Heat sink overheat error
1. Check screw tightening between PC. Board and heat
sink and check radiator grease.
Displayed when
error is detected
P07
P15
Stop
Stop
∗ Heat sink temp. sensor detected
over the specified temperature.
2. Check heat sink cooling.
1. Check gas leak.
Detection of gas leak
2. Check whether the service valve is fully opened.
3. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
4. Check broken pipe.
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ Discharge temp. sensor (TD),
Suction temp. sensor (TS) detected
temperature over the specified temp.
5. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD), suction temp.
sensor (TS).
4-way valve inverse error
1. Check operation of 4-way valve.
∗ After heating operation has started,
indoor heat exchanger temp. lowers
under the specified temp.
2. Check outdoor heat exchanger (TE), suction temp.
sensor (TS).
Displayed when
P19
H01
Stop
Stop
error is detected 3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC).
4. Check 4-way valve coil.
∗ After heating operation has started,
outdoor heat exchanger / suction
temp. rises over the specified temp.
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
Compressor break down
1. Check power supply voltage. (AC198 to 264V)
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ Although operation has started,
operation frequency decreases and
operation stops.
2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle
H01
Compressor lock
1. Trouble of compressor (Lock, etc.): Replace compressor.
Displayed when
H02
H03
H02
H03
* Over-current detection after
compressor start-up
Stop
Stop
2. Wiring error of compressor (Open circuit)
error is detected
Displayed when
error is detected
1. Check outdoor P.C. board. (AC current detection circuit)
Current detection circuit error
– 80 –
Operation of diagnostic function
Cause of operation
Check code
Indoor unit
Judgment and measures
Status of
air conditioner
Condition
before
after
3 series 4 series
1. Check refrigerating cycle (Gas leak)
2. Trouble of electronic expansion valve
3. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).
Discharge temp. error
∗ Discharge temp. (TD) detected
temperature over the specified temp.
Displayed when
error is detected
P03
P04
P03
Stop
1. Check case thermostat and connector.
2. Check gas leak, recharge
Case thermostat operation
Displayed when
error is detected
H04
P05
Stop
Stop
3. Check whether the service valve is fully opened.
4. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
5. Check broken pipe.
∗ Abnormal overheat of compressor
Displayed when 1. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V
error is detected
Power supply voltage error
1. Check outdoor heat exchanger sensor (TL).
2. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC, TCJ).
3. Check full open of service valve.
High pressure protective operation
• During cooling operation, outdoor
temp. sensor (TL) detected
temperature over specified temp.
P20
P22
Stop
Stop
Displayed when 4. Check indoor/outdoor fan.
error is detected
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
• During heating operation, indoor
temp. sensor (TC, TCJ) detected
temperature over specified temp.
6. Check clogging and short circuit of indoor/outdoor heat
exchanger.
7. Overcharge of refrigerant. Recharge
1. Check lock of fan motor.
Displayed when
error is detected
P22
Outdoor fan system error
2. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V
3. Check outdoor P.C. board.
1. When performing operation while taking-off compressor
wire, P26 error occurs. Check control P.C. board.
Short-circuit error of compressor
driving device
Displayed when
Stop
Stop
P26
P29
P26
P29
error is detected 2. When performing operation while taking-off compressor
wire, an error does not occur. (Compressor rare short)
Displayed when 1. Check control P.C. board.
error is detected
Position detection circuit error
– 81 –
10-2-4. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Indoor Unit)
Check code
[E01 error]
NO
Correct inter-unit cable
of remote controller
Is inter-unit cable of A and B normal?
YES
Is there no disconnection or
contact error of connector on harness
from terminal block of indoor unit?
YES
Correct connection of connector.
Check circuit wiring.
NO
NO
Is group control operation?
YES
NO
Check power connection of indoor unit.
(Turn on power again.)
Is power of all indoor units turned on?
YES
NO
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Is power supplied to remote controller?
AB terminal: Approx. DC18V
Defect → Replace
YES
YES
Are 2 remote controllers set
without master unit?
Correct a master unit/a follower unit.
(Remote controller address connector)
NO
Check remote controller P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[E09 error]
YES
Are 2 master units set in
2 remote controllers?
Correct as a master unit
and a follower unit.
NO
Check remote controller P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 82 –
[E04 error]
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Is group address setup of
remote controller correct?
Does outdoor operate?
Check Item code [14].
YES
YES
Are wiring in indoor unit and
1, 2, 3 inter-unit cables correct?
Correct wiring and
inter-unit cables.
YES
Correct wiring of connector
and terminal blocks.
Are wirings of terminal blocks
(1, 2, 3) wired to CN04 normal?
YES
Check indoor P.C. board.
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash
after power supply turned on again?
Defect → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Check indoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
Defect → Replace
[E10 error]
YES
Check power supply voltage.
Correct lines.
Check and eliminate noise, etc.
Is there no disorder of power supply?
NO
Check indoor control P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 83 –
[E18 error]
NO
Correct inter-unit cable
of remote controller.
Is inter-unit cable
of A and B normal?
YES
Is there no disconnection
or contact error of connector
on harness from terminal block
of indoor unit?
YES
Correct connection of connector.
Check circuit wiring.
NO
NO
Is group control operation?
YES
Check power
connection status of indoor unit
(Connect again).
NO
Is power of all indoor units turned on?
YES
NO
Is Twin or Triple control?
YES
Is there no contact error
of indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable
(Signal line) of the main unit?
YES
Correct indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable
(Serial signal line).
NO
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[E08, L03, L07, L08 error]
E08: Duplicated indoor unit No.
L03: There are 2 or more master units in a group control.
L07: There is 1 or more group address [Individual] in a group control.
L08: The indoor group address is unset. (13. ADDRESS SETUP)
If the above error is detected when power supply turned on, the mode enters automatically in the automatic
address set mode. (Check code is not output.)
However, if the above error is detected during the automatic address set mode, a check code may be
output.
[L09 error]
YES
Set capacity data of indoor unit.
(Setup item code (DN)=11)
Is not yet capacity setting
of indoor unit set up?
NO
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 84 –
[L20 error]
Are wiring connections
to communication lines
U3 and U4 normal?
NO
Correct wiring connection.
YES
YES
Is not the multiple same central
control system addresses connected?
Correct central control system address.
NO
Check central controller
(including network adapter) and
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[L30 error]
NO
NO
Are outside devices of
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
connector CN80 connected?
Defect → Replace
YES
Check outside devices.
Defect → Replace
Do outside devices normally work?
YES
Check cause of operation.
[P30 error] (Central controller)
NO
NO
Is group operation carried out?
YES
Is there check code
on sub remote controller in main
and sub remote controllers?
YES
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Check corresponding
indoor unit/outdoor unit.
Defect → Replace
– 85 –
[P10 error]
Is connection of
NO
NO
float switch connector
(Indoor control board CN34)
normal?
Correct connection
of connector.
YES
YES
Does float switch work?
YES
Is circuit wiring normal?
NO
Check and correct wiring
and wire circuit.
NO
Does drain pump work?
YES
Are connector pins 1 and 2
at drain pump unit side shorted
(Resistance value 0)?
NO
NO
Is power of
drain pump turned on? ∗
YES
YES
Replace drain pump
and indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Check the drain pipe, etc.
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Replace drain pump.
Check wiring.
Defect → Replace
∗ Check that voltage of 1-2 pin of CN504 on the indoor P.C. board is +12V. (1 pin is plus (+).)
[F10 error]
NO
Is connection of TA sensor connector
(CN104 on indoor P.C. board) correct?
Correct connection of connector.
YES
NO
Are characteristics of
TA sensor resistance value normal?
Replace TA sensor.
YES
∗ Refer to Characteristics-1.
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 86 –
[P12 error]
Turn off the power.
Is there no connection error or
disconnection on connectors CN333
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board
(MCC-1570)?
YES
Correct connection
of connector.
CN333
NO
Remove connectors CN333
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
CN334
NO
Does the fan rotate without trouble
when handling the fan with hands?
Replace indoor fan motor.
YES
Are resistance values
between phases at fan motor connector
CN333 motor side of indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570) correct? ∗1
Incorrect
Replace indoor fan motor.
Correct
∗1
• Are not coil windings between ꢀ (Red lead) and ꢁ (White lead),
between ꢁ (White lead) and ꢂ (Black lead),
between ꢂ (Black lead) and ꢀ (Red lead) opened or shorted?
→ The resistance should be the resistance value below.
SM40, SM45, SM56, SM80 → Approx. 70 to 100Ω
SM110, SM140, SM160 → Approx. 27 to 40Ω
• Is not grounded between cabinet and ꢀ, ꢁ, ꢂ. → It should be 10MΩ or more.
Is resistance value of
fan motor connector CN334 motor side
of indoor P.C. board
Incorrect
Replace indoor fan motor.
(MCC-1570) correct? ∗2
Correct
∗2
Resistance value confirmation of the fan motor position detection circuit
Is not status between ꢀ (Yellow lead) and ꢃ (Pink lead) opened or shorted?
→ The resistance should be approx. 5k to 20kΩ.
Is output of
indoor fan motor position
NO
Replace indoor fan motor.
detection signal correct? ∗3
YES
∗3
Confirmation of the fan motor position detection signal
• Using a voltage tester, measure voltage between CN334 ꢀ and ꢁ on the indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570) under condition that CN333 and CN334 are mounted and the power supply is turned on.
→ When rotating the fan slowly with hands, the pin voltage should shake between 0 and 5V.
• Between ꢃ and ꢁ: 5V
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 87 –
[F02 error]
NO
NO
Is connection of TC sensor connector
Correct connection of connector.
(CN101 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?
YES
Are characteristics of
TC sensor resistance value normal?
Replace TC sensor.
YES
∗ Refer to Characteristics-2.
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[F01 error]
NO
NO
Is connection of TCJ sensor connector
(CN102 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?
Correct connection of connector.
Replace TCJ sensor.
YES
Are characteristics of
TCJ sensor resistance value normal?
YES
∗ Refer to TCJ sensor
(Temperature-Resistance value characteristic table)
Check indoor main P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 88 –
[C06 error] (TCC-LINK central controller)
NO
NO
Are U3 and U4 communication lines normal?
YES
Correct communication line.
∗1
Correct connection of connector.
Is connection of connector normal?
YES
∗1
TCC-LINK central:
CN51 of TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440) and CN050 of indoor P.C. board
NO
Check connection of A and B terminal blocks.
Correct communication line of remote controller.
Are A and B communication lines normal?
YES
YES
NO
Is there no connection error of power supply cable?
NO
Correct power wiring.
Is not the source power supply turned on?
YES
Turn on the source power supply.
YES
Did a power failure occur?
NO
YES
YES
Is the network address changed
from the remote controller?
Clear the check code.
Eliminate noise, etc.
NO
Is there no noise source?
NO
Uncontrolled
(Same to others)
Can the other indoor units
be normally controlled from the central controller?
Or is the operation status of indoor unit reflected?
Check central controller.
Defect → Replace
YES
Uncontrolled
Can the indoor unit be normally controlled
from the remote controller?
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
YES
Check power supply transformer on
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440).
Defect → Replace
– 89 –
[E03 error] (Master indoor unit)
[E03 error] is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal from the remote controller
(also central controller).
Check A and B remote controllers and communication lines of the central control system U3 and U4.
As communication is impossible, this check code [E03] is not displayed on the remote controller and the central
controller. [E01] is displayed on the remote controller and [C06 error] is displayed on the central controller.
If these check codes generate during operation, the air conditioner stops.
[F29 error]
This check code indicates a detection error of IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the indoor unit P.C.
board, which generated during operation of the air conditioner. Replace the service P.C. board.
∗ When EEPROM was not inserted when power supply turned on or when the EEPROM data read/write
operation is impossible at all, the automatic address mode is repeated. In this time, [97 error] is displayed on
the central controller.
(Approx.
3 minutes)
(Approx.
1 minute)
LED (D02) on indoor unit
P.C. board flashes with
1Hz for approx. 10 seconds.
[SET] is displayed
on remote controller.
[SET]
goes off.
Reboot
(Reset)
(Power ON)
(Repetition)
[P31 error] (Follower indoor unit)
When the master unit of a group operation detected [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08] error, the follower unit of the
group operation detects [P31 error] and then the unit stops.
There is no display of the check code or alarm history of the remote controller. (In this model, the mode enters
in automatic address set mode when the master unit detected [L03], [L07] or [L08] error.)
– 90 –
<In case of SP40 to 56>
10-2-5. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)
1) This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the wired remote controller.
2) When “APPLICATION CONTROL KIT” (TCB-PCOS1E2) sold separately is connected, the error contents
can be judged by LED on the APPLICATION CONTROL KIT. In this case, turn off both bit 1 and 2 of DIP
switch 01 on the All-purpose control kit.
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT
Check / Countermeasures
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)
code
LED display
[E04]
—
[Indoor / Outdoor communication error]
NO
Is setting of group address
on the remote controller correct?
Check item code [14].
YES
NO
Are inner wiring of the indoor unit
and inter-unit wires (1, 2, 3) correct?
Correct wiring
and inter-unit wires.
YES
NO
NO
Is wiring of the
Correct wiring
outdoor terminal block correct?
of terminal block.
YES
Is connection of
case thermo (CN500) correct?
Correct connection
of connector.
YES
Check and correct charged
refrigerant amount.
YES
Does the case thermo operate?
Is the compressor abnormally heated?
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F04]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
Is connection of CN601 correct?
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
¡
¡
l l
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F06]
∗ There is a possibility that any of the following items is not correct.
Checking LED on the APPLICATION CONTROL KIT enables you to judge what is incorrect.
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
¡
Is connection of CN600 correct?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
l l l
Is resistance value of TE sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Suction temp. sensor (TS) error] → Refer to column of [F12].
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
¡
l l
l
LED display legend:
Go off,
Go on,
Flash (5Hz)
¡
¥
l
– 91 –
<In case of SP40 to 56>
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT
Check / Countermeasures
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)
code
LED display
[F08]
D01
D02 D03
D04
[Outside temp. sensor (TO) error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
¡
l
l l
Is connection of CN602 correct?
Is resistance value of TO sensor correct?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F12]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
¡
l l
l
Is connection of CN603 correct?
Is resistance value of TS sensor correct?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H01]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Compressor breakdown]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
Is AC mains voltage correct?
198 to 264V
¥
¥
l
l
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wiring connection correct?
Compressor lead
(P.C. board side, Compressor side)
Reactor cord, Power supply lead
NO
Check and correct
wiring connection.
YES
YES
Remove and
improve the cause of overload.
Does abnormal overload happen?
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H02]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Compressor lock]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
NO
Is AC mains voltage correct?
198 to 264V
¥
l l
l
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wiring connection correct?
Compressor lead
(P.C. board side, Compressor side)
Reactor cord, Power supply lead
Check and
correct connection of wires.
YES
NO
NO
Is compressor
under correct
conditions?
Compressor lock
Is there stagnation
of refrigerant?
→ Replace
YES
NO
TE, TS sensor,
Check PMV.
Defective → Replace
Does PMV operate correctly?
YES
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
LED display legend:
Go off,
Go on,
Flash (5Hz)
¡
¥
l
– 92 –
<In case of SP40 to 56>
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT
Check / Countermeasures
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)
code
LED display
[H03]
D01
D02 D03
D04
[Power supply error, Current detection circuit error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
Are connections of wires correct?
Between power cable and terminal block
Between outdoor P.C. board and terminal block
¥
¥
l l
Correct wires
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[L29]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Power supply error, Current detection circuit error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
¡
¡
l l
or
Correct
power supply line.
Is AC mains voltage correct?
198 to 264V
¥
¥
l
l
YES
NO
Compressor trouble
Rare short check
Defective → Replace
Is compressor under correct conditions?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P03]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Discharge temp. error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
YES
NO
¡
¡
l
l
Is there gas leak?
Repair defective position.
Recharge refrigerant.
Is there refrigerant shortage?
NO
Repair defective position.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV under correct conditions?
YES
YES
Remove and improve
the cause of overload.
Does an abnormal overload happen?
NO
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN601 correct?
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P04]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Power supply error (Voltage error)]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
¡
¡
l l
Confirm power supply
construction, etc.
Is AC mains voltage correct?
198 to 264V
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P05]
[Power supply error (Voltage error)]
D01
D02
D03
D04
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
→ Refer to columns [H03] and [P04] and then check power supply and
voltage error.
¥
¥
l l
or
l l
¡
¡
LED display legend:
Go off,
Go on,
Flash (5Hz)
¡
¥
l
– 93 –
<In case of SP40 to 56>
Check APPLICATION CONTROL KIT
Check / Countermeasures
(Part without special mention indicates a part of the outdoor unit.)
code
LED display
[P19]
—
[4-way reversal error]
NO
Does 4-way valve work correctly?
(Check pipe temperature, etc.
during cooling/heating operation.)
YES
Is coil of 4-way valve
electrified during heating mode?
NO
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
Check 4-way valve.
Defect → Replace
NO
Is flow of refrigerant by
PMV under correct conditions?
Check PMV.
Defect → Replace
YES
Check temperature sensors.
TE sensor CN600, TS sensor CN603
Indoor TC sensor
Defective → Correct or replace
∗ In case of SP40 to 56, the coil of 4-way valve is electrified during cooling cycling.
∗ In cooling operation, [P19] error may be displayed when the refrigerant pressure rises high abnormally.
In this case, remove the cause of pressure rising and then diagnose it again.
[P22]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Outdoor fan system error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
Is connection of connector
CN300 correct?
¡
¡
¡
Correct connection of connector.
l
YES
After pulling out the connector
of the fan motor CN300, rotate its shaft by hands.
Can it rotate smoothly?
Is the fan motor coil resistance within the range described below?
Between red and white lead : 18 to 30Ω
Between white and black lead : 18 to 30Ω
Between black and red lead : 18 to 30Ω
NO
Fan motor
exchange
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defective → Replace
[P26]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Short-circuit of compressor driving device]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
NO
Is AC mains voltage correct?
198 to 264V
Correct power line.
¥
l l l
YES
Is there any problem on connection
of compressor lead or reactor?
(Check connection referring to the wiring diagram.)
YES
Correct wiring.
NO
NO
Replace
outdoor P.C. board.
After disconnection of the compressor leads from
P.C. board, the air conditioner operates in heating mode.
Does the fan motor run?
YES
Check compressor. (Rare short, etc.)
Defective → Replace
[P29]
D01
D02
D03
D04
[Position detection circuit error]
(Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defective → Replace
¥
l
l l
LED display legend:
Go off,
Go on,
Flash (5Hz)
¡
¥
l
– 94 –
<In case of SP80>
10-2-6. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)
1) This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the wired remote controller.
2) In some cases, a check code indicates multiple symptoms.
In this case, confirm LED display on the outdoor P.C. board to narrow the contents to be confirmed.
3) The check code on the remote controller is displayed only when the same error occurred continuously by
multiple times while LED of the outdoor P.C. board displays even an error which occurred once.
Therefore the display on the remote controller may differ from that of LED.
How to check LED display on outdoor P.C. board
Dip switch setup
<Latest error display>
Only 1) of SW803 is ON.
• When turning on 1) only of SW803, the latest error
is displayed. As the memory is stored, it can be
confirmed even if the power supply is turned off
once. (excluding outside temp. sensor (TO) error)
• When the work finished or the outdoor temp.
sensor (TO) error was found, turn off all of SW803.
(The error which occurs at present is displayed.)
<Error display, which occurs at present>
All SW803 are OFF. (Initial status)
Display selection
<Display 1> ó<Display 2>
(No error) (Error occurred)
(Push SW800)
• When an error happens, some of yellow LED
(D800 to D804) turn on. <Display 1>
D800 (Yellow)
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
¡
l
• If pushing the button switch SW800 for 1 second
under the above condition, the yellow LED is
displayed with flashing. <Display 2>
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
¡
• When pushing SW800 for 1 second again, the
status returns to <Display 1>.
(Example of discharge temp. sensor error)
: Go off, : Go on, : Flash
• The error contents can be confirmed by combining
<Display 1> and <Display 2>.
¡
¥
l
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
—
[E04]
[Indoor/Outdoor communication error]
NO
Is setting of group address
of remote controller correct?
Check Item code [14].
YES
NO
Are inner wiring of indoor unit and
inter-unit wires (1, 2, 3) correct?
Correct wiring
and inter-unit cable.
YES
NO
NO
Are CN04 connection and wiring
of terminal blocks (1, 2, 3) correct?
Correct wiring of connectors
and terminal blocks.
YES
After turning off the power supply,
turn on it again.
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash?
Check indoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 95 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[F04]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN603 correct?
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F06]
• There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error, Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error,
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error, Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS)
<Display 1> <Display 2> Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN601 correct?
Is resistance value of TE sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error] → Refer to [F07] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error] → Refer to [F12] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)] → Refer to [F15] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
[F07]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN604 correct?
Is resistance value of TL sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 96 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[F08]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Outside temp. sensor (TO) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN602 correct?
Is resistance value of TO sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F12]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN600 correct?
Is resistance value of TS sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F13]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
l
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replac
[F15]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
NO
NO
NO
Is mounting status of
TE and TS sensors correct?
Correct sensor mounting.
YES
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN600 correct?
Is resistance value of TS sensor correct?
YES
Is connection of CN601 correct?
Correct connector.
Is resistance value of TE sensor correct?
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F31]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 97 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[H01]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor break down]
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
NO
Is AC mains voltage correct?
AC198 to 264V
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wire connection correct?
Compressor lead
(Board side, Compressor side),
Reactor lead, Power supply lead
NO
Check wire connection
and correct it.
YES
YES
Remove and improve
the cause of overload.
Does an abnormal overload happen?
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H02]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor lock]
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
l
¡
NO
NO
Is AC mains voltage correct?
AC198 to 264V
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wire connection correct?
Compressor lead
(Board side, Compressor side),
Reactor lead, Power supply lead
Check wire connection
and correct it.
YES
YES
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Is compressor under correct conditions?
NO
Defect → Replace
Is there refrigerant stagnation?
YES
Compressor lock → Replace
NO
Check TE, TS sensors and PMV.
Does PMV correctly operate?
YES
Defect → Replace
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H03]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Current detection circuit error]
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 98 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[H04]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation]
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO
NO
Are CN609 connection and
case thermostat correct?
Correct connector.
Case thermostat error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Short each pins of CN609.
Can compressor operate?
Defect → Replace
YES
YES
NO
Repair defectives position.
Recharge refrigerant.
Is there gas leak?
Is there refrigerant shortage?
NO
Is service valve fully opened?
YES
Open service valve fully.
NO
Correct defective position.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV under correct conditions?
YES
Check crushed or broken pipe.
Defect → Correct and Replace
[L10]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type]: Only when service P.C. board is used
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
Cut jumper line according
to the explanation sheet packaged
with the service P.C. board.
– 99 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[L29]
∗ There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.
Communication error between MCU, Heat sing temp. sensor (TH) error,
EEPROM error, Unset model type, Heat sink overheat error, Gas leak detection,
4-way valve inverse error
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Communication error between MCUs]
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error] → Refer to [F13] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error] → Refer to [F31] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type] → Refer to [L10] column.
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error] → Refer to [P07] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection] → Refer to [P15] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error] → Refer to [P19] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
– 100 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P03]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
YES
NO
Repair defective position.
Recharge refrigerant.
Is there gas leak?
Is there refrigerant shortage?
NO
Repair defective position.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV under correct conditions?
YES
YES
Remove and improve
the cause of overload.
Does an abnormal overload happen?
NO
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is connection of CN603 correct?
Is resistance value of TD sensor correct?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P04]
∗ There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.
Power supply error (Vdc), High pressure protective operation, Case thermostat
operation
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation] → Refer to [H04] column.
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error] → Refer to [P05] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation] → Refer to [P20] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
[P05]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO
Is AC mains voltage correct?
198 to 264V
Confirm power supply
construction, etc.
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 101 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P07]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
Are the power devices on
P.C. board screwed without looseness?
(Rear sides of Q201, Q300, Q650, DB01, DB02)
Are radiation grease properly applied?
(Q201, Q650, DB01, DB02)
NO
YES
Apply radiation grease to objective parts.
Retightening of screws.
(Be sure not to forget to attach insulating sheet
between heat sink and Q300.)
Does something block the
ventilation around the heat sink?
Does something block air flow
from the fan?
YES
Remove blocking matter.
Correct short-circuit.
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P15]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
YES
Is there gas leak?
Is there refrigerant shortage?
Repair defective part.
Recharge refrigerant.
NO
NO
Correct defective part.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV under correct conditions?
YES
NO
Open service valve fully.
Is service valve fully opened?
YES
YES
Correct and replace piping.
Is there crushed pipe?
NO
Check temp. sensor.
TD sensor CN603
TS sensor CN600
Error
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
OK
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 102 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P19]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve reversal error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
Temperature sensor check
TE sensor CN601
TS sensor CN600
Indoor TC sensor
Defect → Correct and repair
Does 4-way valve
work correctly?
(Check pipe temp. etc.
in cooling/heating operation.)
YES
NO
Is the coil resistance value
of 4-way valve between
1.3kΩ and 1.6 kΩ?
NO
Replace coil of 4-way valve.
YES
Check operation of
outdoor P.C. board.
(See below.)
Error
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → replace
OK
Check 4-way valve.
Defect → Replace
Check method of outdoor P.C. board operation (Self-holding valve type)
1) Set SW804 of Dip switch as the following figure and then push SW801 for
approx. 1 second to check exchange operation to cooling cycle/heating cycle.
• Power is turned on for approx. 10 seconds.
• In case of operating with the coil of 4-way valve connected to CN701, take
interval over 1 minute before re-operation; otherwise it may cause overheat
of the coil.
2) After check, turn off all the Dip switch SW804.
Exchange to cooling cycle
Exchange to heating cycle
SW804 SW801 CN701
1
SW804 SW801 CN701
1
Push
4
Push
4
DC200V or more
DC200V or more
Note) Check by tester
Analog tester : Good if over DC200V
Digital tester : Good if the maximum voltage is over DC200V though
the varied voltage may be displayed.
∗ In cooling operation, [P19] error may happen when the refrigerant pressure rose
abnormally. In this case, remove the cause of pressure rising and then diagnose
the error again.
– 103 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P20]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
NO
Is service valve
fully opened?
Open service valve fully.
YES
Reset the power supply
and then perform test run
matching to the season.
Cooling season
Cooling operation
Heating season
Heating operation
NO
Is resistance value
of TL sensor correct?
YES
Replace TL sensor.
YES
Is there any defect such as
loosening of nut in the outdoor fan?
NO
Check outdoor fan.
Defect → Replace, retightening
YES
Does the outdoor fan perform
abnormal operation?
NO
Check the same items as
[P22] error.
Is there anything
which interfere heat exchange
of outdoor unit?
YES
• Clogging of heat exchanger
• Short-circuit
NO
Eliminate interfering element.
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.
Defect → Correct defect.
NO
NO
Does indoor fan
operate correctly?
Are indoor fan motor
an connector correct?
YES
YES
Repair defect.
NO
Are resistance values
of indoor TC and TCJ
sensors normal?
Replace
sensor.
YES
Check indoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
Is there anything which interfere
heat exchange of indoor unit?
• Choking up the filter
• Clogging of heat exchanger
• Short-circuit
YES
Eliminate interfering element.
NO
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.
Defect → Correct defect.
– 104 –
<In case of SP80>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P22]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Fan system error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
¥
¡
NO
Is AC mains voltage correct?
(198 to 264V)
Check wiring construction.
Ask repair of power supply.
YES
Rotate shaft of the fan motor by hands
during power-OFF. Can it rotate smoothly?
Is coil resistance of fan motor correct?
YES
Between red and white lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
Between white and black lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
Between black and red lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Replace fan motor.
Defect → Replace
Single operation check for outdoor fan
1) Set Dip switch of SW804 as the following figure and then push SW801 for
approx. 1 second to check single operation of outdoor fan.
Use this method to check which fan, upper or lower fan, has a trouble.
• When SW801 is pushed for 1 second
again or 2 minutes passed, the fan stops.
Outdoor fan single operation
2) After check, turn off all Dip switch of
SW804.
SW804
SW801
Push
[P26]
<Display 1> <Display 2>
[Short-circuit of compressor drive element]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
¥
¡
Are connections of
NO
compressor lead and reactor correct?
(Check referring to the Wiring diagram.)
Correct wiring.
YES
YES
Does the same error occur in
operation without compressor lead?
Replace outdoor P.C. board.
NO
Check compressor. (Rear short, etc.)
Defect → Replace
[P29]
<Display 1> <Display 2>
[Position detection circuit error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
—
No code
<Display 1> <Display 2>
[Other error] Compressor disorder due to sudden change of load, etc.
∗ Although the display of outdoor LED outputs, the unit automatically restarts
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
and error is not determined.
∗ LED display also may output due to wire coming-off of compressor.
– 105 –
10-2-7. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)
Temperature sensor Temperature – Resistance value characteristic table
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors TD,TL sensors
Representative value
Representative value
Resistance value (kΩ)
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)
Resistance value (kΩ)
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)
Temperature
Temperature
(°C)
(°C)
0
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
32.33
19.63
12.23
9.75
33.80
20.35
12.59
10.00
7.990
5.192
3.451
2.343
1.623
1.146
0.8237
0.6023
35.30
21.09
12.95
10.25
8.218
5.375
3.594
2.454
1.709
1.213
0.8761
0.6434
0
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150.5
92.76
58.61
47.01
37.93
25.12
17.00
11.74
8.269
5.925
4.321
3.205
161.3
99.05
62.36
49.93
40.22
26.55
17.92
12.34
8.668
6.195
4.507
3.336
172.7
105.6
66.26
52.97
42.59
28.03
18.86
12.95
9.074
6.470
4.696
3.468
7.764
5.013
3.312
2.236
1.540
1.082
0.7740
0.5634
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Temperature (˚C)
TD,TL sensors
200
150
100
50
20
15
10
5
0
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Temperature (˚C)
∗ As TH sensor (Outdoor unit heat sink temp. sensor) is incorporated in the outdoor control P.C. board, the
resistance value cannot be measured.
– 106 –
11. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD
11-1. Indoort Unit (Slim DuctType)
<Note: when replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing>
The nonvolatile memory (hereafter called EEPROM, IC503) on the indoor unit P.C. board before replacement
includes the model specific type information and capacity codes as the factory-set value and the important
setting data which have been automatically or manually set when the indoor unit is installed, such as system/
indoor/group addresses, high ceiling select setting, etc.
When replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, follow the procedures below.
After replacement completes, confirm whether the settings are correct by checking the indoor unit No., Group
header unit/follower unit settings and perform the cooling cycle confirmation through the trial operation.
<Replacement procedures>
CASE 1
Before replacement, the indoor unit can be turned on and the setting data can be read out by
wired remote control operation.
EEPROM data read out [1]
ò
Replacement of P.C. board for Indoor unit servicing and power on [2]
ò
Writing the read out EEPROM data [3]
ò
Power reset
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)
CASE 2
The EEPROM before replacement is defective and the setting data cannot be read out.
EEPROM data read out [2]
ò
Writing the setting data to EEPROM, such as high ceiling installation setting and
optional connection setting, etc., based on the customer information. [3]
ò
Power reset
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)
– 107 –
[1] Setting data read out from EEPROM
The setting data modified on the site, other than factory-set value, stored in the EEPROM shall be read out.
SET
CL
TEST
Step 1 Push
,
and
button on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.
∗ When the group operation control is performed, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation
and the swing operation also starts if it has the louvers.
UNIT LOUVER
Step 2 Every time when the
button is pushed, the indoor unit No. under the group control is displayed in
order. Specify the indoor unit No. to be replaced.
1. Change the CODE No. (DN) to 10 → 01 by pushing
/
buttons for the temperature
setting. (this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)
At this time, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.
2. Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing
/
buttons for the temperature setting.
Similarly, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.
3. Repeat the step 2-2 to set the other settings in the same way and write down the setting data as shown
in the table 1 (example).
∗ The CODE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) may skip.
TEST
Step 3 After writing down all setting data, push
button to return to the normal stop status.
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)
CODE No. required at least
1. The CODE No. for the Indoor unit type and Indoor unit capacity are
required to set the rotation number setting of the fan.
DN
10
11
12
13
14
Contents
Type
2. If the system/indoor/group addresses are different from those before
replacement, the auto-address setting mode starts and the manual
resetting may be required again.
Indoor unit capacity
System address
Indoor unit address
Group address
(when the multiple units group operation including twin system.)
[2] P.C. Board for indoor unit servicing replacement procedures
Step 1 Replace the P.C. board to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.
At this time, perform the same setting of the jumper wire (J01) setting (cut), switch SW501, (short-circuit)
connector CN34 as the setting of the P.C. board before replacement.
Step 2 According to the system configuration, turn on the indoor unit following to the either methods shown below.
a) Single operation (Indoor unit is used as standalone.)
Turn on the indoor unit.
1. After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].
(System address = 1, Indoor unit address = 1, Group address = 0 (standalone) are automatically set.)
SET
CL
TEST
2. Push
,
and
buttons simultaneously for more than 4 seconds to interrupt the auto-address
setting mode, and proceed to [3]. (The unit No. “
” is displayed.)
b) Group operation (including twin system)
Turn on the indoor unit(s) with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, accord-
ing to either methods 1 or 2 shown below.
1. Turn on only the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced. (Be sure to confirm the remote controller is
surely connected. If not, the operation [3] cannot be performed.)
Perform either methods 1 or 2 described in item a) above.
2. Turn on the multiple indoor units including the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced.
• Twin 1 system only
• All group connections
After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].
∗ The header unit of the group may be changed by performing the auto-address setting.
Also, the system address/Indoor unit address of the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced may be
assigned to the addresses (not used) other than those of the indoor units without its P.C. board replaced.
It is recommended to keep the information in advance, which cooling system the indoor unit belongs to
or whether the indoor unit works as the header unit or the follower unit in the group control operation.
– 108 –
[3] Writing the setting data to EEPROM
The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.
SET
CL
TEST
Step 1 Push
,
and
buttons on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.1
∗ In the group control operation, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation
and the swing operation starts if it has the louvers.
(The unit No. “
” is displayed if the auto-address setting mode is interrupted in [2] step 2 a))
UNIT LOUVER
Step 2 Every time when
button is pushed, the indoor unit No. in the group control operation are displayed
in order. 2
(The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.)
Specify the indoor unit No. with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.
(You cannot perform this operation if “
” is displayed.)
Step 3 Select the CODE No. (DN) can be selected by pushing the
/
button for the temperature setting. 3
• Set the indoor unit type and capacity.
The factory-set values shall be written to the EEPROM by changing the type and capacity.
1. Set the CODE No. (DN) to “10 ”. (without change)
2. Select the type by pushing
/
buttons for the timer setting. 4
(For example, 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type is set to “0001”. Refer to table 2)
SET
3. Push
button. 5 (The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.)
buttons for the temperature setting.
buttons for the timer setting.
4. Change the CODE No. (DN) to “11 ” by pushing
5. Select the capacity by pushing
/
/
(For example, 80 Type is set to “0012”. Refer to table 3)
SET
6. Push
button. 6 (The setting completes if the setting data are displayed.)
7. As P.C. board of the Slim Duct type differs from that of the 4-way Discharge Cassette type, selection by
HP is unnecessary.
TEST
8. Push the
button to return to the normal stop status.
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)
If the plug for short-circuit is attached on the P.C. board
before replacement, attach it on the P.C. board replaced.
Connector (CN504)
for drain pump
CN34
SW501
(Red)
J02
Type
Jumper wire (J02)
J01
Slim Duct
SM40 to 56
None
<Fig. 1 RBC-AMT32E>
3
5
4
2
1
6
– 109 –
Step 4 Write the on-site setting data to the EEPROM, such as address setting, etc. Perform the steps 1 and 2
above again.
Step 5 Change the CODE No. (DN) to “01 ” by pushing
/
buttons for the temperature setting.
(this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)
Step 6 Check the setting data displayed at this time with the setting data put down in [1].
1. If the setting data is different, modify the setting data by pushing
/
buttons for the timer setting to
the data put down in [1].
The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.
2. If the data is the same, proceed to next step.
Step 7 Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing
As described above, check the setting data and modify to the data put down in [1].
Step 8 Repeat the steps 6 and 7.
Step 9 After the setting completes, push
/
buttons for the temperature setting.
TEST
button to return to the normal stop status.
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote control operation is available again.)
∗ The CODE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) is not limited to be serial No.
SET
Even after modifying the data wrongly and pushing
button, it is possible to return to the data before
CL
modification by pushing
button if the CODE No. (DN) is not changed.
<Fig. 2 EEPROM layout diagram>
The EEPROM (IC503) is attached to the IC socket. When detaching the EEPROM, use a tweezers, etc.
Be sure to attach the EEPROM by fitting its direction as shown in the figure.
∗ Do not bend the IC lead when replacing.
Cut out
EEPROM
EEPROM
IC503
Cut out
IC socket
– 110 –
Table 1. Setting data (CODE No. table (example))
Setting data
DN
01
02
03
Item
Filter sign lighting time
Factory-set value
Depending on Type
Filter pollution leve
0000: standard
Central control address
0099: Not determined
0002: +2°C
(flooring installation type: 0)
06
Heating suction temperature shift
OF
10
11
12
13
14
Cooling only
0000: Heat pump
Type
Depending on model type
Depending on capacity type
0099: Not determined
0099: Not determined
0099: Not determined
Indoor unit capacity
System address
Indoor unit address
Group address
Temperature range of cooling/heating
automatic SW control point
1E
0003: 3 deg (Ts ± 1.5)
28
2A
2b
31
32
40
Power failure automatic recovery
Option/Abnormal input (CN70) SW
0000: None
0002: Humidifier
Thermo output SW (T10
)
0000: Thermo ON
0000: Not available
0000: Body sensor
0003: Humidifier ON + Pump OFF
Ventilation fan (standalone)
Sensor SW (Selection of static pressure)
Humidifier control (+ drain pump control)
0000: Standard (10Pa)
0001: High static pressure 1 (20Pa)
0003: High static pressure 2 (35Pa)
0006: High static pressure 3 (50Pa)
5d
External static pressure
60
Timer setting (wired remote controller)
0000: Available
0075: 75 %
Demand setting
(outdoor unit current demand)
C2
d0
d1
Remote controller operation save function
Frost protection function
0001: Enable
0000: None
Table 2. Type: CODE No. 10
Table 3. Indoor unit capacity: CODE No. 11
Setting data
Type
Type name abb.
Setting data
0000*
0006
Type
Disable
40
0005
Slim Duct Type
RAV-SM∗∗∗SDT-E
0007
45
0009
56
0012
80
0015
110
140
160
0017
0018
∗ EEPROM initial value on the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.
– 111 –
12. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS
12-1. Indoor Unit (Slim DuctType)
12-1-1. Test Run Setup on Remote Controller
<Wired remote controller>
TEST
1. When pushing
button on the remote controller for 4 seconds or more, “TEST” is displayed on LC display.
ON / OFF
Then push
button.
• “TEST” is displayed on LC display during operation of Test Run.
• During Test Run, temperature cannot be adjusted but air volume can be selected.
• In heating and cooling operation, a command to fix the Test Run frequency is output.
• Detection of error is performed as usual. However, do not use this function except case of Test Run
because it applies load on the unit.
2. Use either heating or cooling operation mode for [TEST].
NOTE : The outdoor unit does not operate after power has been turned on or for approx. 3 minutes after
operation has stopped.
TEST
3. After a Test Run has finished, push
button again and check that [TEST] on LC display has gone off.
(To prevent a continuous test run operation, 60-minutes timer release function is provided to this remote
controller.)
12-1-2. Forced Defrost Setup of Remote Controller (For wired remote controller only)
(Preparation in advance)
TEST
SET
CL
1
Push
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.
(Push buttons while the air conditioner stops.)
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.
UNIT
2
Every pushing
other.
button, the indoor unit No. in the group control is displayed one after the
Select a main indoor unit (outdoor unit is connected) which is to be defrosted. In this time, fan and louver of
the selected indoor unit operate.
TEMP.
3
4
5
6
Using the set temperature
buttons, specify the item code (DN) 8C.
TIME
Using the timer time
buttons, set time to data 0001. (0000 at shipment)
SET
Push
button. (OK if indication lights)
TEST
Pushing
button returns the status to the normal stop status.
(Practical operation)
ON / OFF
• Push ON/OFF
Key.
• Select the HEAT mode.
• After while, the forced defrost signal is sent to the outdoor unit and then the outdoor unit starts defrost operation.
(The forced defrost operation is performed for Max. 12 minutes.)
• After defrost operation finished, the operation returns to the heating operation.
To execute the defrost operation again, start procedure from above item 1 .
(If the forced defrost operation was executed once, setting of the above forced defrost operation is cleared.)
– 112 –
12-1-3. LED Display on P.C. Board
1. D501 (Red)
• It goes on (Goes on by operation of the main microcomputer) at the same time when the power supply is
turned on.
• It flashes with 1-second interval (every 0.5 second):When there is no EEPROM or writing-in operation fails.
• It flashes with 10-seconds interval (every 5 second): During DISP mode
• It flashes with 2-seconds interval (every 1 second): While setting of function select (EEPROM)
2. D403 (Red)
• It goes on when power supply of the remote controller is turned on. (Lights on hardware)
3. D503 (Yellow): Main bus communication
• It goes on for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the central controller.
4. D504 (Green): Sub bus communication
• It flashes for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the remote controller. (Group master unit)
• It flashes with 0.2-second interval (for 0.1 second) for 5 second in the latter half of communication between
master and follower in the Gr indoor unit.
5. D14 (Orange)
• It flashes while receiving the serial signal from the outdoor unit. (Hardware)
6. D15 (Green)
• It flashes while sending the serial signal to the outdoor unit. (Hardware)
12-1-4. Function Selection Setup
<Procedure> Perform setting while the air conditioner stops.
TEST
SET
CL
1
Push
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.
In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit operate.
ò
button (button at left side), the indoor unit No. in the group control is
displayed one after the other. In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only operate.
UNIT LOUVER
2
Every pushing
ò
TEMP.
3
4
5
Using the set temperature
buttons, specify the item code (DN).
ò
TIME
Using the timer time
buttons, select the set data.
ò
button. (OK if indication lights)
SET
Push
• To change the selected indoor unit, proceed to Procedure
2
.
• To change item to be set up, proceed to Procedure
3
.
TEMP.
ON / OFF
ò
button returns the status
to the normal stop status.
TEST
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
6
Pushing
3
6
4
5
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
1
2
<Operation procedure>
1 2 3 4 5 6 END
– 113 –
Function selection item No. (DN) list
DN
Item
Contents
At shipment from factory
0000: None
0001: 150H
01 Filter sign lighting time
0002: 2500H
0004: 10000H
0003: 5000H
0005: Clogging sensor used
According to type
0000: Standard
0001: Heavy stain (Half of standard time)
02 Filter stain level
0000: Standard
0001: No.1 unit
0099: Undecided
to
0064: No.64 unit
03 Central control address
0099: Undecided
0000: No shift
0002: +2°C
0001: +1°C
0010: +10°C
(Up to +6 is recommended.)
0002: +2°C
(Floor type 0000: 0°C)
06 Heating suction temp. shift
to
0000: Heat pump
0001: Cooling only (No display for [AUTO] [HEAT] )
0F Cooling-only
10 Type
0000: Heat pump
0000: (1-way air discharge cassette)
0001: (4-way air discharge cassette) to 0037
According to model type
11 Indoor unit capacity
12 Line address
0000: Undecided
0001: No.1 unit
0001: No.1 unit
0000: Individual
0001 to 0034
According to capacity type
0099: Undecided
to
to
0030: No.30 unit
13 Indoor unit address
0064: No.64 unit
0099: Undecided
0001: Master unit in group
14 Group address
0099: Undecided
0002: Follower unit in group
In automatic cooling/heating, temp. 0000: 0 deg
to
0010: 10 deg
1E width of cool → heat, heat →
(Cool/heat are reversed with ± (Data value) /
2 against the set temperature)
0003: 3 deg (Ts±1.5)
0000: None
cool mode selection control point
28 Automatic reset of power failure
0000: None
0000: Filter input
0001: Provided
Selection of option / error input
(CN70)
2A
0001: Alarm input (Air cleaner, etc.)
0002: Humidifier input
0002: Humidifier
Selection of thermostat output
(T10 )
0000: Indoor thermostat ON
0001: ON receiving output of outdoor compressor
2b
0000: Thermostat ON
0000: Normal (JEMA)
2E Selection of HA (T10) terminal
0001: Card input (Forgotten to be off)
0002: Fire alarm input
0000: Normal (HA terminal)
31 Fan (Single operation)
32 Sensor selection
0000: Impossible
0001: Possible
0000: Impossible
0000: Body TA sensor
0001: Remote controller sensor
0000: Body sensor
0000: No control
Humidifier control
40 (+Drain pump control)
(This function is not provided.)
0001: Humidifier + Vaporizing type (Pump ON)
0002: Humidifier + Supersonic type
(Pump ON when specified time elapsed)
0003: Humidifier + Natural drain type (Pump OFF)
0003: Humidifier ON
Pump OFF
0000: Standard (At shipment)
0001: High static pressure 1
0003: High static pressure 2
0006: High static pressure 3
(10 Pa)
(20 Pa)
(35 Pa)
(50 Pa)
5d External static pressure
0000: Standard
Timer setting
60
0000: Operable
0001: Operation prohibited
0000: Operable
0075: 75%
(Wired remote controller)
C2 Current demand X% to outdoor unit 0050: 50%
to
0100: 100%
Existence of remote controller save 0000: Invalid (Impossible)
function 0001: Valid (Possible)
D0
D1
0001: Valid (Possible)
Existence of 8°C heating operation 0000: Invalid (Impossible)
function 0001: Valid (Possible)
0001: Invalid (Impossible)
– 114 –
12-1-5. Wiring and Setting of Remote Controller Control
2-remote controller control
<Wired remote controller>
(Controlled by 2 remote controllers)
How to set wired remote controller
as sub remote controller
This control is to operate 1 or multiple indoor units
are operated by 2 remote controllers.
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)
Change DIP switch inside of the rear side of the
remote controller switch from remote controller master
to sub. (In case of RBC-AMT32E)
• When connected 2 remote controllers
operate an indoor unit
Remote controller (Inside of the rear side)
Remote controller
switch (Master)
Remote controller
switch (Sub)
Sold
separately
Sold
separately
1 2
Sub remote
controller
A B
A B
Master remote
controller
1
2
Remote controller
cables (Procured locally)
DIP switch
Terminal block for
remote controller cables
1
2
A B
Indoor unit
1 2 3
<Wireless remote controller>
1 2 3
How to set wireless remote controller to sub
remote controller
Outdoor unit
Change OFF of Bit [3: Remote controller Sub/Master]
of switch S003 to ON.
• When connected 2 remote controllers
operate the twin
[Operation]
Remote controller
switch (Master)
Remote controller
1. The operation contents can be changed by Last-
push-priority.
switch (Sub)
Remote controller
inter-unit wire
(Procured locally)
Sold
separately
Sold
separately
2. Use a timer on either Master remote controller or
Sub remote controller.
A B
A B
Terminal block for
remote controller cables
A B
A B
Indoor unit 1
1 2 3
Indoor unit 2
1 2 3
1 2 3
Inter-unit wiring
between indoor units
(Procured locally)
Outdoor unit
(Setup method)
One or multiple indoor units are controlled by
2 remote controllers.
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)
– 115 –
12-1-6. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch
n Calling of sensor temperature display
<Contents>
Each data of the remote controller, indoor unit and outdoor unit can be understood by calling the service
monitor mode from the remote controller.
<Procedure>
CL
TEST
1
Push
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds to
call the service monitor mode.
The service monitor goes on, the master indoor unit No. is
displayed at first and then the temperature of item code 00 is
displayed.
TEMP.
ON / OFF
ò
TEMP.
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
2
Push temperature set
buttons and then change
the item code of data to be monitored.
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
The item code list is shown below.
2 4 1
<Operation procedure>
3
1 2 3 4
Returned to usual display
Item code
Data name
Room temperature
Unit
Item code
Data name
Unit
01
°C
60
61
62
63
65
6A
F1
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TE)
Outside temperature (TO)
°C
°C
(Remote controller)
02
03
Indoor suction temperature (TA)
°C
°C
Compressor discharge temperature (TD)
Compressor suction temperature (TS)
Heat sink temperature (THS)
°C
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)
temperature (TCJ)
°C
°C
04
F3
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)
temperature (TC)
°C
Operation current (× 1/10)
A
Filter sign time
×1h
Compressor calculated operation time
×100h
ò
UNIT LOUVER
3
4
Push
button to select the indoor unit to be monitored.
Each data of the indoor unit and its outdoor units can be monitored.
ò
TEST
Pushing
button returns the status to the usual display.
∗1 The indoor discharge temperature of item code [F8] is the estimated value from TC or TCJ sensor.
Use this value to check discharge temperature at test run.
(A discharge temperature sensor is not provided to this model.)
• The data value of each item is not the real time, but value delayed by a few seconds to ten-odd seconds.
• If the combined outdoor unit is one before 2 or 3 series, the outdoor unit data [6D], [70], [72] and [73]
are not displayed.
– 116 –
n Calling of error history
<Contents>
The error contents in the past can be called.
<Procedure>
SET
TEST
1
Push
+
buttons simultaneously for
TEMP.
ON / OFF
4 seconds or more to call the service check mode.
Service Check goes on, the item code 01 is displayed, and
then the content of the latest alarm is displayed. The number
and error contents of the indoor unit in which an error oc-
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
2 curred are displayed.
In order to monitor another error history, push the set
temperature buttons to change the error
history No. (Item code).
/
Item code 01 (Latest) → Item code 04 (Old)
NOTE : 4 error histories are stored in memory.
2 3 1
TEST
3
Pushing
button returns the display to usual display.
<Operation procedure>
1 2 3
REQUIREMENT
CL
Returned to usual display
Do not push
button, otherwise all the error histories of the
indoor unit are deleted.
(Group control operation)
In a group control, operation of maximum 8 indoor units can be controlled by a remote controller.
The indoor unit connected with outdoor unit (Individual/Master of twin) controls room temperature according to
setting on the remote controller.
<System example>
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
Master
2-1
1-1
3-1
4-1
7-1
Max. 8 units
Remote controller
1. Display range on remote controller
The setup range (Operation mode/Air volume select/Setup temp) of the indoor unit which was set to the
master unit is reflected on the remote controller.
2. Address setup
Turn on power of the indoor unit to be controlled in a group within 3 minutes after setting of automatic
address.
If power of the indoor unit is not turned on within 3 minutes (completion of automatic address setting), the
system is rebooted and the automatic address setting will be judged again.
1) Connect 3 In/Out cables surely.
2) Check line address/indoor address/group address of the unit one by one.
3) The unit No. (line/indoor gout address) which have been set once keep the present status as a rule if the
unit No. is not duplicated with one of another unit.
– 117 –
n Indoor unit power-ON sequence
Power ON
• The unit without power feed waits entirely
→ Waiting status is released by system start
• Reboot when power is fed on the way
<By feed unit>
<Automatic
address judgment>
Not normal
NO
3 minutes elapse
Gr construction check
YES
Normal
∗ Gr normal
1) There is no duplicated indoor unit address.
2) There is no invalid indoor unit address.
3) Individual unit and master/follower units
are not intermingled.
4) Only a unit for individual.
5) A master indoor unit and 1 or more
follower indoor units for Gr.
System start
Automatic address starts.
(Approx. 1 minute up to finish)
<Initial communication>
Outdoor model distinction (10 seconds) (Indoor unit)
Twin Master/follower distinction (Indoor unit)
Gr construction, louver information (Remote controller)
<Cautions at test run>
• Power supply/Indoor/Outdoor serial and Gr wiring: OK
• Powers of all indoor units are turned on within 3 minutes.
• Reception time for remote controller operation
(After power supply was turned on)
1) When address is OK : Approx. 50 seconds
2) In AUTO address
: Approx. 4 to 5 minutes
Remote controller operation is available.
(Approx. 50 seconds after power-ON)
<Usual regular
communication>
Regular communication between indoor units (Every 30 seconds) (Master/Follower)
Regular communication on the identical pipe (every 30 seconds) (Twin Master/Follower)
(When the above status changes, immediately communicates.)
(Repetition)
• In a group operation, if the indoor unit which was fed power after judgment of automatic address cannot
receive regular communication from the master unit and regular communication on identical pipe within
120 seconds after power was turned on, it reboots (system reset).
→ The operation starts from judgment of automatic address (Gr construction check) again.
(If the address of the master unit was determined in the previous time, the power fed to the master unit and
reboot works, the master unit may change though the indoor unit line address is not changed.)
– 118 –
12-2. Setup at Local Site / Others
Model name:TCB-PCNT30TLE2
12-2-1. TCC-LINK Adapter (For TCC-LINK Central Control)
1. Function
This model is an optional P.C. board to connect the indoor unit to TCC-LINK (Central controller).
2. Microprocessor block diagram
Indoor unit
Central controller
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board
CN40
CN050
Indoor control
P.C. board
CN041
CN51
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
Terminal
resistance
SW01
MCC-1440
Terminal block
(A, B)
TCC-LINK
Communication units
Communication distance : 2000 m
: Total 64 units
Remote controller
3. TCC-LINK wiring connection
CAUTION
1) When controlling customized setup collectively, TCC-LINK adapter (This option) is required.
2) In case of group operation or twin operation, the adapter is necessary to be connected to the main unit.
3) Connect the central control devices to the central control system wiring.
4) When controlling collectively customized setup only, turn on only Bit 1 of SW01 of the least line of the system
address No. (OFF when shipped from the factory)
∗ In case of customized setup, the address is necessary to be set up again from the wired remote
controller after automatic addressing.
Central control device
Central control device
Central control devices: Max. 10 units
U1 U2
U3 U4
U1 U2
U3 U4
Refrigerant line 1
Refrigerant line 2
Refrigerant line 3
1 2 3
Refrigerant line 4
1 2 3
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)
Central control system wiring
Caution 3
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only
Master
unit
Sub
unit
Sub unit
Master unit
Indoor unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
U3 U4 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
A B
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
A B
A B
TCC-LINK adapter
This product
(
)
Caution 1
Caution 2
sold separately
Remote controller
wiring
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Group operation (Max. 8 units)
Indoor units in all refrigerant lines: Max. 64 units
Twin operation
[If mixed with multi model (Link wiring), multi indoor units are included.]
* However group sub units and twin sub units of customized setup are not included in number of the units.
– 119 –
4. Wiring specifications
No. of wires
Size
• Use 2-core with no polar wire.
Up to 1000m: twisted wire 1.25mm2
Up to 2000m: twisted wire 2.0mm2
2
• Match the length of wire to wire length of the central
control system.
If mixed in the system, the wire length is lengthened with all indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire length at side.
• To prevent noise trouble, use 2-core shield wire.
• Connect the shield wire by closed-end connection and apply open process (insulating process) to the last
terminal. Ground the earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side. (In case of central controlling of digital inverter
unit setup)
CAUTION
1) Closed-end connection of shield wire (Connect all the connecting parts of each indoor unit)
2) Apply open process to the last terminal (insulating process).
3) Ground earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side.
Central control device
U1 U2
Caution 2
Caution 1
Caution 3
Central control system wiring
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
: TCC-LINK adapter
(This option)
Master
unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
Sub unit
1 2 3
Sub unit
Master unit
Indoor unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
1 2 3
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
A B
A B
A B
Earth terminal
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
(Group operation)
(Twin operation)
5. P.C. board switch (SW01) setup
When performing collective control by customized setup only, the setup of terminator is necessary.
• Using SW01, set up the terminator.
• Set up the terminator to only the adapter connected to the indoor unit of least line address No.
Central control device
Central control device
Central control devices: Max. 10 units
U1 U2
U3 U4
U1 U2
U3 U4
Refrigerant line 1
Outdoor unit
Refrigerant line 2
Refrigerant line 3
1 2 3
Refrigerant line 4
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)
Central control system wiring
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only
Master
unit
Sub
unit
Sub unit
Master unit
Indoor unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
U3 U4 1 2 3
1 2 3
A B
Remote controller wiring
Remote controller Remote controller
Group operation (Max. 8 units)
1 2 3
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
A B
A B
A B
TCC-LINK adapter
This product
sold separately
(
)
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Twin operation
Line address
SW01 Bit 1
SW01 Bit 2
Remarks
1
ON
OFF
2
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
(OFF at shipment from factory)
(OFF at shipment from factory)
Turn SW01 Bit 1 to ON. As status shipped from factory
As status shipped from factory
(Reference) Setup contents of switch
SW01
Terminator
Remarks
Bit 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Bit 1
OFF
OFF
ON
None
100Ω
75Ω
Mixed with multi (Link wiring) at shipment from factory
Central control by digital inverter only
Spare
Spare
ON
43Ω
– 120 –
6. External view of P.C. board assembly
Terminator (SW01)
52
85
7. Address setup
In addition to set up the central control address, it is necessary to change the indoor unit number.
(Line/Indoor/Group address). For details, refer to TCC-LINK Adapter Installation Manual.
12-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number
When connecting the indoor unit to the central control remote controller using TCC-LINK adapter, it is neces-
sary to set up the central control address number.
• The central control address number is displayed as the line No. of the central control remote controller.
1. Setup from remote controller at indoor unit side
∗ If you use the network adapter P.C. board, it is effective only when No. 7 of setup switch SW01 on P.C.
board is turned off.
<Procedure> Perform setup while the unit stops.
VENT
TEST
1
Push
When group control is executed, first the unit No.
control are selected. In this time, fans of all the selected indoor units are turned on. (Fig. 1)
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.
is displayed and all the indoor units in the group
UNIT LOUVER
(Keep
displayed status without pushing
button.)
In case of individual remote controller which is not group-controlled, Line address and Indoor unit address
are displayed.
TEMP.
2
3
Using temperature setup
buttons, specify item code 03.
TIME
Using timer time
buttons, select the setup data.
The setup data is shown in the table below (Table 1).
SET
4
5
Push
button. (OK if display goes on.)
(Fig.1)
• To change the item to be set up, return to Procedure 2.
TEST
Push
button.
The status returns to usual stop status.
(Table 1)
TEMP.
ON / OFF
Setup data
Central control address No.
TIMER SET
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
2
1
0001
0002
0003
:
1
2
3
TIME
3
1
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
:
0064
64
0099
Unset (Setup at shipment from factory)
4
5
– 121 –
2. How to confirm the central control address
(New function for AMT32E remote controller)
<Procedure> It can be confirmed even during operation or stopping.
UNIT LOUVER
1
2
Push
button for 4 seconds or more.
ò
In the frame at left side of the remote controller screen, the lighting set contents are
displayed.
During unset time, 0099 (At shipment from factory) is displayed.
ò
After lighting display for 3 seconds, the display automatically disappears.
3
If any button is pushed during display, immediately the display disappears and then the pushed button is
displayed.
3. How to set contents of save operation
In combination with outdoor units before 4 series, the displayed setup value exchanges, but the real operation is
“75% fixed”.
SAVE
1
2
Push
for 4 seconds or more during stop of the operation.
flashes.
•
UNIT LOUVER
Push
(At the left side of the button) and select the unit to be set.
• Every pushing the button, the unit No. changes.
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the louver swings.
UNIT No.
1–1
UNIT No.
1–2
UNIT No.
1–3
UNIT No. 1–4
3
Determine the capacity restricted value when pushing the save button of TIMER SET
/
.
• Every pushing the button, the capacity restricted value can be set at 1% interval in the range between
100% and 50%.
∗ The setting at shipment is 75%.
Setup value at saving
SET
TEST
4
Push
and then push
to finish the setup.
– 122 –
4. When installing separately sold filters
REQUIREMENT
• When you use this air conditioner for the first time, it takes approx. 5 minutes until the remote controller becomes
available after power-on. This is normal.
<When power is turned on for the first time after installation>
Approx. 5 minutes
It takes approx. 5 minutes until the remote controller
Remote
becomes available.
“SETTING”
flashes
“SETTING”
goes out
Power ON
controller
is available
<When power is turned on for the second (or later) time>
Approx. 1 minute
Remote
It takes approx. 1 minute until the remote controller
“SETTING”
flashes
“SETTING”
goes out
becomes available.
Power ON
controller
is available
• Normal settings were made when the indoor unit
was shipped from factory. Change the indoor unit settings as required.
• Use the wired remote controller to change the settings.
∗ The settings cannot be changed using the wireless remote controller, sub remote controller, or remote-
controllerless system (for central remote controller only).
Therefore, install the wired remote controller to change the settings.
n Changing of settings of for applicable controls
Basic procedure for changing settings
Change the settings while the air conditioner is not working.
(Be sure to stop the air conditioner before making settings.)
1
3
Procedure 1
4
TEST
Push
button and temp. setup
/
button
5
simultaneously for at least 4 seconds.
6
1
After a while, the display flashes as shown in the
figure. Confirm that the CODE No. is [01].
2
TEST
• If the CODE No. is not [01], push
the display content, and repeat the procedure from
the beginning.
button to erase
Procedure 4
Using timer time
/
buttons, select SET DATA
(No operation of the remote controller is accepted for
[
].
∗∗∗∗
TEST
a while after
button is pushed.)
Procedure 5
Push
SET
button. When the display changes from
flashing to lit, the setup is completed.
• To change settings of another indoor unit, repeat
from Procedure 2.
• To change other settings of the selected indoor unit,
repeat from Procedure 3.
(∗ Display content varies with the indoor unit model.)
SET
Use
button to clear the settings.
SET
To make settings after
from Procedure 2.
button was pushed, repeat
Procedure 2
UNIT LOUVER
Each time you push
button, indoor unit
Procedure 6
When settings have been completed, push
numbers in the control group change cyclically.
Select the indoor unit you want to change settings for.
TEST
button
to determine the settings.
The fan of the selected unit runs. You can confirm the
indoor unit for which you want to change settings.
TEST
When
button is pushed, “SETTING” flashes and
then the display content disappears and the air
conditioner enters the normal stop mode.
(While “SETTING” is flashing, no operation of the
remote controller is accepted.)
∗∗
-
∗∗
∗∗∗∗
Procedure 3
Using temp. setup
No. [ ].
/
buttons, specify CODE
∗∗
– 123 –
When wireless remote controller is used
n Setup of external static pressure
Change the external static pressure setting with the
DIP switch on the receiver section P.C. board.
Be sure to set up a tap change based upon the
resistance (external static pressure) of the duct
to be connected.
For details, refer to the manual of the wireless
remote controller kit.
To set up a tap change, follow to the basic
operation procedure
The settings can also be changed with the switch on
the indoor microcomputer P.C. board.
→
(1 2
→
→
→
→
3 4 5 6 ).
∗ However, once the setting is changed, setting to
0001 or 0006 is possible but setting to 0000
requires a setting data change to 0000 using the
wired remote controller (separately sold) with the
normal switch setting (factory setting).
• Specify [5d] to the item code in procedure 3.
• For the setup data of procedure 4, select a
setup data of the external static pressure to be
set up from the following table.
<Change on wired remote controller>
Setup data
0000
External static pressure
10 Pa
Standard (At shipment)
High static pressure 1
High static pressure 2
High static pressure 3
0001
20 Pa
35 Pa
50 Pa
0003
0006
SW501-1
SW501-2
MCU (IC501)
Setup data
SW501-1
SW501-2
0000
(Factory shipping)
OFF
OFF
0001
0003
0006
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
To restore the factory settings
To return the DIP switch settings to the factory
settings, set SW501-1 and SW501-2 to OFF, con-
nect a separately sold wired remote controller, and
then set the data of CODE No. [5d] to “0000” in
“Setup of external static pressure” on this page.
– 124 –
n Change of lighting time of filter sign
n How to set up power saving mode
SAVE
According to the installation condition, the lighting
time of the filter sign (Notification of filter clean-
ing) can be changed.
1. Push
button for at least four seconds
when the air conditioner is not working.
flashes. Indicates CODE No. “C2.”
Follow to the basic operation procedure
2. Select an indoor unit to be set by pushing
UNIT LOUVER
→
→
→
→
→
(1 2
3 4 5 6 ).
(left side of the button).
• For the CODE No. in Procedure 3, specify [01].
• For the [Set data] in Procedure 4, select the
setup data of filter sign lighting time from the
following table.
Each time you push the button, unit numbers
change as follows:
Unit No.
1-1
Unit No.
1-2
Unit No.
1-3
Setup data
0000
Filter sign lighting time
None
Unit No.
1-4
0001
150H
2500H (At shipment from factory)
5000H
0002
The fan of the selected unit runs.
0003
3. Adjust the power save setting by pushing
0004
10000H
TIME
/
buttons. Each push of the
button changes the power level by 1% within
the range from 100% to 50%.
* The factory setting is 75%.
n To secure better effect of heating
• This indication may not be true for types
other than 4-series outdoor unit.
When it is difficult to obtain satisfactory heating
due to installation place of the indoor unit or
structure of the room, the detection temperature
of heating can be raised.
Also use a circulator, etc. to circulate heat air
near the ceiling.
Follow to the basic operation procedure
→
(1 2
→
→
→
→
3 4 5 6 ).
• For the CODE No. in Procedure 3, specify [06].
• For the set data in Procedure 4, select the
setup data of shift value of detection tempera-
ture to be set up from the table below.
Setting of power level
in power saving mode
Setup data
0000
Detection temp shift value
SET
4. Determine the setting by pushing
button.
No shift
TEST
5. Push
button to complete the setting.
0001
+1°C
0002
+2°C (At shipment from factory)
0003
+3°C
+4°C
+5°C
+6°C
0004
0005
0006
– 125 –
12-4. Outdoor Unit
12-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control
The “ozone destruction coefficient” of HFC refrigerant is 0 and the discharge regulation is set as anathermal
effect gas.
To this model, a switch which can perform the refrigerant recovery (pump down) by the outdoor unit is mounted
so that it is easy to react against the environment at reinstalling or rejection time.
[Operation method]
<SP56>
1) See the mode of the indoor unit to fan mode.
2) Push the refrigerant recovery switch (SW802) of the outdoor unit for approx. 2 seconds.
The cooling operation starts. (This operation finishes after 10 minutes.)
3) After operation for 3 minutes or more, close the valve at liquid side.
4) After recovering refrigerant, close the valve at gas side.
5) When keeping pushed the refrigerant recovery SW again for approx. 2 seconds, the outdoor unit stops.
6) Stop the indoor unit and then turn off the power supply.
Sub SW P.C. board of
model with 3HP or below
SW802
Refrigerant recovery
SW
Refrigerant recovery
SW
ON
SW801
Exchange
to Cooling
only
Existing
piping
N
Power saving
Sub SW P.C. board
NOTE
The electric portion of the refrigerant recovery SW on the sub-board
is electrified, therefore be careful to an electric shock.
W804: All OFF (As initial status)
SW801: Push for 1 second.
<SP80>
1) Set the mode of the indoor unit to fan mode.
2) Set all DIP switch SW804 to OFF (Initial status) and then push
the button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.
The D805 (Green LED)
flashes.
The cooling operation starts.
(During this time, D805 (Green LED) flashes.)
D800
D801
D802
D803
D804
D805
This operation finishes by 10 minutes.
3) After operation for 3 minutes or more, close valve at liquid side.
4) After recovery of refrigerant, close valve at gas side.
5) Push the button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second.
The outdoor unit stops.
6) Stop the indoor unit and then turn off the power supply.
– 126 –
12-4-2. Various Setting on Outdoor Unit (Existing piping, Power save, Cooling-only, etc.)
The following settings are available by DIP switch setup and jumper line setup.
<SP56>
Function
Setting position
Control contents
Existing piping
setup
Turn off the switches. (Ø19.1 existing pipes cannot be used.)
SW801
ON
When using the power saving function, turn on switches.
The control to lower the compressor frequency (approx. -10%) is performed
by indoor heat exchanger temp. in heating operation.
Power save
setup
1
2
3
Existing pipe setting
Power saving setting
Cooling only setting
When using the outdoor unit as a cooling-only machine, turn on switches.
(“OF” of DN cord on the remote controller also can be used for changing the
machine to the cooling-only model.)
Cooling-only
setup
<SP80>
Function
Set position
Control contents
Turn the switch to ON when mounting a duct to the discharge port of the
outdoor unit. Add 3 taps to the upper limit value of the outdoor fan tap.
The operation is performed with
(Max: Upper fan: 890 rpm / Lower fan: 910 rpm (WF)).
High static
pressure setup
SW802
In this case, the upper limit value of static pressure for duct is 5Pa or less on
25°C degrees and please use straight duct.
High static pressure setup
Existing piping setup
Power save setup
In this case, the outdoor noise level may increase.
Turn the switch to ON when Ø19.1 is used for the existing pipe.
Existing
piping setup
In this case, the heating capacity may lower according to outside temp. and
indoor temp. in heating operation.
Snow-proof fan control
Turn the switch to ON when using the power save function.
Power save
setup
The control to lower the compressor frequency (Approx. –10%) is performed
by indoor heat exchanger temp. in heating operation.
∗ all are OFF at shipment.
When snow enters from clearance of the fan guard or heat exchanger into
blast path and it is accumulated, the control to prevent generation of motor
lock is validated.
Snow-proof
fan control
When outside temp. is below 0°C though the compressor stops, the outdoor
fan operates with W5.
The defrost interval is cut to shorten it than the standard status.
Defrost
time change
J805, J806
For contents of control and cutting method, refer to Section
9-1-10. Defrost control.
When it is needed to lower the maximum value of the compressor frequency,
cut the jumper line. Max. frequency at cooling/heating is lowered.
In this case the Max. capacity decreases.
Max. frequency of compressor
Max. frequency
change
J807
RAV-SP80
Model
COOL
HEAT
Standard status
When J807 is cut
72.0
99.6
72.0
79.2
When using the air conditioner as a cooling-only conditioner, cut the jumper
line. (An air conditioner can be changed to cooling-only conditioner by “0F” of
DN code on the remote controller.)
Cooling-only
setup
J808
– 127 –
12-4-3. Service Support Function (LED Display, Switch Operation)
<SP80 only>
1. Outline
A various setup and operation check can be performed by DIP switches at 3 positions (SW802, SW803,
SW804) and the pushdown button switches (SW800, SW801) at 2 positions.
Operation part
Part No.
SW800
SW803
SW801
SW804
SW802
Specifications
Pushdown button switch
DIP switch
Operation contents
Exchanges the displayed contents of LED (D800 to D804) on the outdoor
control P.C. board.
Pushdown button switch
DIP switch
Performs the specific operation to check maintenance.
Performs various initial settings. (Refer to 12-4-2.)
DIP switch
Display part
Part No.
Specifications
Operation contents
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display
(Receive signal from indoor signal)
D502
Orange LED
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display
(Send signal from outdoor signal)
D503
Green LED
Yellow LED
Error display
When all SW803 are OFF, or when any of D800 to D804 goes on, LED
displays that the outdoor controller detects an error.
D800 to D804
When status of SW803 is other than OFF, various indications are displayed.
Power-ON display
When the power of the outdoor unit is turned on, LED goes on.
When SW801 and SW804 operate the specific operation, LED flashes.
D805
Green LED
∗ All LED are colorless when it goes off.
SW804 Specific operation switch
SW801 (Various operations during maintenance check operation)
SW800
LED display select switch
SW803
D800 (Yellow LED)
D801 (Yellow LED)
D802 (Yellow LED)
D803 (Yellow LED)
D804 (Yellow LED)
Error display / various display
D800
D801
D802
D803
D804
D805
D805 (Green LED) : Display while power is ON
D503 (Green LED) : Serial signal (Outdoor → Indoor)
D502 (Orange LED) : Serial signal (Indoor → Outdoor)
SW802 : Selection of various initial settings
– 128 –
2. Selection of LED display (SW800, SW803 operation)
1) Display selection list
The displayed contents of LED D800 to D804 on the outdoor control P.C. board can be exchanged by
operation of SW803.
Switch
Function / Contents
Refer
Error display (Error generating at present)
Error generating at present is displayed.
Refer to
Page 130.
SW803
This switch goes off when an error does not generate.
Error display (The latest error: Latest error including present)
Refer to
Page 130.
After error status was cleared, the error which generated before
can be confirmed by this setting. (Reconfirmation is available
even if power supply was turned off once.)
SW803
• If an error generates at present, the same contents as those of
error which is generating at present are displayed.
• Only error of TO sensor is not displayed by this setting.
(Confirm it by setting of error which is generating at present.)
Temperature sensor display
Refer to
Page 131.
TD
SW803
TE
SW803
TS
SW803
The detected value of temperature sensor is displayed.
TO
SW803
TL
SW803
TH
SW803
TA
SW803
TC
SW803
TCJ
SW803
Current display
Refer to
Page 131.
SW803
SW803
SW803
The current value which flows in the outdoor unit is displayed.
Compressor operation frequency display
Refer to
Page 131.
The operation frequency of the compressor is displayed.
PMV opening display
Refer to
Page 131.
The opening of PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) is displayed.
– 129 –
2) Error display
The error which is generating at present and the latest error (Latest error information including present)
can be confirmed by lighting LED D800 toD804 on the outdoor control P.C. board.
a) When all DIP switch SW803 are OFF, the status of error which is generating at present is displayed.
b) <1> only of DIP switch SW803 is turned on, the error which generated before
(Latest error information including present) is displayed.a)
c) If there is an error, any of LED D800 to D804 goes on. (Display 1)
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW800 for approx. 1 second, the display is exchanged.
(Display 2)
e) When pushing SW800 again or after 2 minutes, the status returns to that of Display
.
(Legend)
Present error
Latest error
SW803
SW803
D800 (Yellow)
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
: Go on,
: Flash
l : Go off,
¡
¥
Display 1)
Display 2)
Wired remote controller
Error code
Error contents
(Initial display) (SW800 operation)
Normal
—
F04
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll
lllll
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error
Outside temp. sensor (TO) error
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error
Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error
Heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS) miswiring
EEPROM error
¥
ll ll
F06
¥¥
l
ll
F06, F07
F08
¥¥¥
ll
¥ ¡
lll l
¡¡
¡¡
ll
F06, F12
F13, L29
F06, F15
F31, L29
H01
¥¥ ¡
l
ll
¥ ¥¥ ¡
l l
¥¥¥¥ ¡
l
¥¥¥¥¥¡
Compressor break down
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
llll
Compressor lock
H02
¥
l lll
¡ ¡¡
ll l
Current detection circuit error
Case thermostat operation
Model unset
H03
¥¥
lll
H04, P04
L10, L29
L29
¥
ll ll
¥ ¥ ¡
l l l
Communication error between MCU
Other error (Compressor disorder, etc.)
Discharge temp. error
¡¡ ¡¡
l
¥ ¥¥¥¡
l
l
Error is not determined.
P03
¥¥¥¥¥¡
¥¥
¡
¡
¡
lll
Power supply error
P04, P05
P07, L29
P15, L29
P19, L29
P04, P20
P22
¥ ¥
l ll
Heat sink overheat error
¥¥¥
ll
Gas leak detection
¥¥¥¥ ¡
l
4-way valve reverse error
¡¡¡ ¡¡
l
¥¥
¥¡
ll
High pressure protective operation
Fan system error
¥ ¥¡
ll l
¥¥ ¥¡
l
l
Driving element short-circuit
Position detection circuit erro
P26
¥ ¥¥¡
l l
P29
¥ ¥¥¥¡
l
∗ As the error code displayed on the wired remote controller may differ according to type of indoor model, multiple
codes are described.
– 130 –
3) Sensor, current, compressor operation frequency, PMV opening display
The values detected by the controller, such as temperature sensor or current value are simply confirmed.
(Legend)
D800 (Yellow)
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
l
l
l
l
l
¡
: Go on
l : Go off,
¡
Temperature sensor (°C)
Compressor
operation
frequency
(rpm)
PMV
opening
(Pulse)
Current
(A)
TD
SW803
TE
TS
SW803
TO
SW803
TL
SW803
Item
setup
SW803
SW803
SW803
SW803
TH
SW803
TA
SW803
TC
SW803
TCJ
SW803
LED
display
Below –25
–25 to –21
–20 to –16
–15 to –11
–10 to – 5
–5 to –1
0 to 4
0 to 0.9
1 to 1.9
0 to 4
5 to 9
0 to 19
20 to 39
40 to 59
60 to 79
80 to 99
100 to 119
120 to 139
140 to 159
160 to 179
180 to 199
200 to 219
220 to 239
240 to 259
260 to 279
280 to 299
300 to 319
320 to 339
340 to 359
360 to 379
380 to 399
400 to 419
420 to 439
440 to 459
460 to 479
480 to 499
500
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll
¡
llll
¡
2 to 2.9
10 to 14
15 to 19
20 to 24
25 to 29
30 to 34
35 to 39
40 to 44
45 to 49
50 to 54
55 to 59
60 to 64
65 to 69
70 to 74
75 to 79
80 to 84
85 to 89
80 to 84
95 to 99
100 to 104
105 to 109
110 to 114
115 to 119
120 to 124
125 to 129
130 to 134
135 to 139
140 to 144
145 to 149
150 to 154
Over 155
l lll
3 to 3.9
¡¡
lll
4 to 4.9
¡
ll ll
5 to 5.9
¡ ¡
l ll
6 to 6.9
¡¡
l
¡¡¡
ll
ll
5 to 9
7 to 7.9
10 to 14
15 to 19
20 to 24
25 to 29
30 to 34
35 to 39
40 to 44
45 to 49
50 to 54
55 to 59
60 to 64
65 to 69
70 to 74
75 to 79
80 to 84
85 to 89
90 to 94
95 to 99
100 to 104
105 to 109
110 to 114
115 to 119
Over 120
8 to 8.9
¡ ¡
lll l
¡
9 to 9.9
¡ ¡
ll l
¡ ¡ ¡
l l l
10 to 10.9
11 to 11.9
12 to 12.9
13 to 13.9
14 to 14.9
15 to 15.9
16 to 16.9
17 to 17.9
18 to 18.9
19 to 19.9
20 to 20.9
21 to 21.9
22 to 22.9
23 to 23.9
24 to 24.9
25 to 25.9
26 to 26.9
27 to 27.9
28 to 28.9
29 to 29.9
30 to 30.9
Over 31
¡¡ ¡ ¡
l l
¡¡ ¡
ll
l
¡ ¡¡ ¡
l
¡¡¡ ¡
l
l
¡¡¡¡ ¡
l
l
¡¡
¡¡
¡¡
¡¡
llll
¡
lll
¡
l ll
¡¡
ll
¡ ¡¡
ll l
¡ ¡ ¡¡
l l
¡¡ ¡¡
l
¡¡¡ ¡¡
l
l
¡¡¡
lll
¡
ll
l l
¡¡¡
—
¡ ¡¡¡
—
¡¡ ¡¡¡
l
¡¡¡¡
—
ll
—
¡ ¡¡¡¡
l
¡¡¡¡¡
—
l
¡¡¡¡¡¡
Sensor error, unconnected
—
∗ As TD, TL and TH are sensors for high temperature, there is error at normal temperature or below position.
∗ For current value, the current for the outdoor unit only is displayed.
– 131 –
4) Specific operation for maintenance check (SW801, SW804)
The following specific operations for the maintenance check are performed by operation of SW801 or
SW804.
a) Select DIP switch SW804. (See table below)
b) Push the pushdown button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.
c) The following functions start. While each function starts, LED D805 (Green) flashes.
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second, when selecting
DIP switch SW804 or when the specified time of each function elapsed, each function stops and
LED D805 (Green) returns to the continuous lighting.
<Specific operation>
SW804
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed
Refrigerant recovery operation
SW804
The outdoor unit performs cooling operation. The indoor unit does not work by this operation
alone. Therefore operate the fan beforehand. (Refer → 12-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control)
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
Indoor cooling test run demand
The cooling test run is performed. (→ Note 1)
Indoor heating test run demand
The heating test run is performed. (→ Note 1)
Fan motor forced operation
Drive the fan motor forcedly.
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
(No operation especially)
[NOTE]
Although these operations can
be performed even during
operation, basically perform
operation while the unit stops.
PMV full open operation
If performing this operation
Open PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.
during driving the unit, it is
dangerous because the
pressure may change suddenly.
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
PMV full close operation
Close PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
PMV middle opening operation
Set PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) to middle opening
(250 pulses).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
Note 1) Indoor cooling test run demand / Indoor heating test run demand
Only when combining with the following indoor unit, cooling/heating operation can be performed from the
outdoor unit.
Test run is available: Indoor unit of 4 series and after (RAV-SM
4UT-E etc.)
∗∗∗
Test run is unavailable: Indoor units other than the above-mentioned indoor units, or indoor units other
than above-mentioned indoor units are included in the twin connection.
Note 2) The forced test run by this setting cannot be cleared on the indoor remote controller.
Be sure to clear the test run by operation of the outdoor unit. (Push SW801 again for 1 second.)
– 132 –
SW804
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed
4-way valve relay operation (For RY700, CN70 check)
Turn on 4-way valve power relay (RY700).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
SW804
[NOTE]
In case of model adopting the self hold valve
(RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E), the coil develops fever.
Therefore do not perform this operation as coil is connected.
SW804
Self-hold valve suction operation (Exchange to heating cycle)
(For RY700 RY701, RY705, CN701 check)
Turn on relay RY700, RY701, RY705.
(CN701 between
and
: Voltage=Approx. +198 to 380V)
This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.
SW804
Self-hold valve separation operation (Exchange to cooling cycle)
Turn on relay RY700.
(CN701 between 1) and 4): Voltage=Approx. –198 to 380V)
This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.
[CAUTION]
SV valve relay operation (For RY702, CN702 check)
Turn on SV valve relay (RY702).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
* For RAV-SP1104AT-E to RAV-SP1404AT-E, the part is not
mounted, so do not operate.
SW804
Although these operations can be
performed even during operation,
basically perform operation while
the unit stops.
If performing this operation during
driving the unit, it is dangerous
because the pressure may change
suddenly.
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
Heater output relay operation (For check RY703, CN703 check)
Turn on relay for option heater (RY703).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
Outside output relay operation (RY704, CN704)
Turn on relay for outside output (RY704).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
(No operation especially)
Relay operation change for outside output
[CAUTION]
Do not use this setting.
– 133 –
13. ADDRESS SETUP
13-1. Address Setup Procedure
When an outdoor unit and an indoor unit are connected, or when an outdoor unit is connected to each indoor
unit respectively in the group operation even if multiple refrigerant lines are provided, the automatic address
setup completes with power-ON of the outdoor unit.The operation of the remote controller is not accepted while
automatic address works. (Approx. 4 to 5 minutes)
Setup of line address of outdoor unit,
indoor unit address, and group address
Completion of cabling work
NO
Do you arbitrarily set the
indoor unit address?
YES
NO
NO
(MANUAL)
Is refrigerant line 1 line?
YES
Is group control performed?
YES
(To AUTO address mode)
Do you change setting after
automatic setting at the first time?
YES
Connect one remote controller with
one indoor unit (1 : 1) tentatively with
communication cable.
Turn on power of outdoor unit.
Turn on power of outdoor unit.
Turn on power of outdoor unit.
After completion of address
setup, change is to arbitral
address/group manually.
Setup of automatic
address finishes within
4 to 5 minutes.
(
)
Set to all indoor units one by one.
(
)
END
• When the following addresses are not stored in the neutral memory (IC503) on the indoor P.C. board, a test
run operation cannot be performed. (Unfixed data at shipment from factory)
Item code Data at shipment
Setup data range
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)
Line address
12
13
0099
0099
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)
Max. value of indoor units in the identical refrigerant line
Indoor unit address
0000 : Individual (Indoor units which are not controlled in a group)
0001 : Master unit (1 indoor unit in group control)
Group address
14
0099
0002 : Sub unit (Indoor units other than master unit in group control)
– 134 –
13-2. Address Setup & Group Control
<Terminology>
Indoor unit No. : N - n = Outdoor unit line address N (Max. 30) - Indoor unit address n (Max. 64)
Group address : 0 = Single (Not group control)
1 = Master unit in group control
2 = Sub unit in group control
Master unit (= 1) : The representative of multiple indoor units in group operation sends/receives signals to/from
the remote controllers and sub indoor units.
(* It has no relation with an indoor unit which communicates serially with the outdoor units.)
The operation mode and setup temperature range are displayed on the remote controller LCD.
(Except air direction adjustment of louver)
Sub unit (= 2)
: Indoor units other than master unit in group operation
Basically, sub units do not send/receive signals to/from the remote controllers.
(Except errors and response to demand of service data)
Header unit (Representative unit) (Master Twin)
: This unit communicates with the indoor unit (follower) which serial-communicates with the
outdoor units and sends/receives signal (Command from compressor) to/from the outdoor
units as the representative of the cycle control in the indoor units of the identical line address
within the minimum unit which configures one of the refrigerating cycles of Twin.
Follower unit (Subordinate unit) (Sub Twin)
: Indoor units excluding the header unit in Twin
This unit communicates with (Header) indoor unit in the identical line address and performs
control synchronized with (Header) indoor unit.
This unit does not perform the signal send/receive operation with the outdoor units. :
No judgment for serial signal error.
13-2-1. System Configuration
1. Single
2. Twin
Outdoor
Indoor
1-1
Individual
1-1
1-2
Sub/Follower
(Master/Header)
Master/Header
Remote
controller
3. Single group operation
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
4-1
3-1
Sub/Header
8-1
Sub/Header
Master/Header
– 135 –
13-2-2. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)
1) Single
1-1
Individual
(Master/Sub)
2) Group operation (Twin, Triple operation)
(Multiple outdoor units = Miltiple indoor units only with serial communication)
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
1-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
Sub/Follower
Master/Header
Sub/Follower
Sub/Follower
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)
• Header unit:
The header unit receives the indoor unit data (thermo status) of the follower (Without identical line
address & indoor/outdoor serial) and then finally controls the outdoor compressor matching with its own
thermo status.The header unit sends this command information to the follower unit.
• Follower unit:
The follower unit receives the indoor unit data from the header (With identical line address & indoor/
outdoor serial) and then performs the thermo operation synchronized with the header unit.
The follower unit sends own thermo ON/OFF demand to the header unit.
(Example)
No. 1-1 header unit sends/receives signal to/from No. 1-2 and No. 1-3 follower units.
(It is not influenced by the line 2 or 3 address indoor unit.)
– 136 –
13-2-3. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)
1) Single
2) Twin
3) Triple
(1-1)
(1-2)
(1-1)
1-2
(1-2)
(1-3)
1-1
Individual
1-2
Master/Header
1-1
1-3
1-1
Sub/Follower
Sub/Header
Master/Follower
Sub/Follower
(Master/Header)
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)
2. Group operation
(Multiple outdoor units = Multiple indoor units with serial communication only, without twin)
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
3-1
8-1
Sub/Header
Master/Header
(Max. : 8 units)
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)
3. Multiple groups operation
Single
Twin
Triple
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
2-3
3-1
Sub/Header
3-3
1-2
Sub/Follower
Master/Follower
Sub/Follower
2-1
1-1
1-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
Change is necessary
Manually change addresses of the multiple follower units simultaneously from the remote controller.
– 137 –
13-3. Remote Controller Wiring
• Strip off approx. 9 mm the wire to be connected.
• For single system, use non polarity, 2 core wire is used for wiring of the remote controller.
(0.5 mm² to 2.0 mm² wires)
• For the synchronous twin, triple system, use 2-core shield wire (Vinyl cord for microphone 0.5 to 2.0 mm²) to
conform to the EMC standard.
Wiring diagram
Terminal block for remote controller
wiring of indoor unit
Terminal block
A
B
A
B
Remote controller
unit
Remote controller wire
(Procured locally)
∗ For details of wiring/installation of the remote controller, refer to the Installation Manual enclosed with the
remote controller.
<Single system>
Remote controller
Remote controller wiring
A
1
B
2
Indoor side
3
3
Indoor/
Outdoor connecting wires
1
L
2
Outdoor side
N
220-240V~
– 138 –
13-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)
In case that addresses of the indoor units will be
determined prior to piping work after cabling work
(Example of 2-lines cabling)
(Real line: Cabling, Broken line: Refrigerant pipe)
• Set an indoor unit per a remote controller.
• Turn on power supply.
Outdoor
Outdoor
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Indoor
A B
Indoor
A B
Indoor
A B
Indoor
A B
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
Line address → 1
Indoor unit address → 1
Group address → 1
SET
CL
TEST
A B
1
2
Push
+
+
buttons simultaneously
for 4 seconds or more.
Remote controller
For the above example, perform setting by
connecting singly the wired remote controller
without remote controller inter-unit cable.
(← Line address)
Using the temperature setup
set 12 to the item code.
/
buttons,
Group address
Individual : 0000
Master unit : 0001
3
4
5
Using timer time
/
buttons, set the line address.
In case of group control
Sub unit
: 0002
SET
Push
button. (OK when display goes on.)
(← Indoor unit address)
Using the temperature setup
/
buttons, set 13 to the item code.
6
7
8
Using timer time
/
buttons, set 1 to the line address.
SET
Push
button. (OK when display goes on.)
(← Group address)
Using the temperature setup
/
buttons, set 14 to the item code.
9
Using timer time
/
buttons, set 0000 to Individual, 0001 to Master unit, and 0002 to sub unit.
SET
10
11
Push
Push
button. (OK when display goes on.)
TEST
button.
Setup completes. (The status returns to the usual stop status.)
TEMP.
ON / OFF
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
2, 5, 8
3, 6, 9
END 11
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
4, 7, 10
1
<Operation procedure>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 END
– 139 –
13-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position
1. To know the indoor unit addresses though position of the indoor unit body is recognized
• In case of individual operation (Wired remote controller : indoor unit = 1 : 1)
(Follow to the procedure during operation)
<Procedure>
ON / OFF
1
2
Push
button if the unit stops.
button.
UNIT LOUVER
Push
Unit No. 1-1 is displayed on LCD.
TEMP.
ON / OFF
1
(It disappears after several seconds.)
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
Operation
The displayed unit No. indicate line address and
indoor unit address.
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
(When other indoor units are connected to the
identical remote controller (Group control unit),
other unit numbers are also displayed every pushing
UNIT LOUVER
2
button.
<Operation procedure>
END
1 2
2. To know the position of indoor unit body by address
• To confirm the unit No. in the group control
(Follow to the procedure during operation) (in this procedure, the indoor units in group control stop.)
<Procedure>
The indoor unit numbers in the group control are
successively displayed, and fan, louver, and drain pump
of the corresponding indoor unit are turned on.
(Follow to the procedure during operation)
VENT
TEST
1
Push
4 seconds or more.
and
buttons simultaneously for
TEMP.
ON / OFF
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
• Unit No.
is displayed.
1
3
• Fans and louvers of all the indoor units in the
group control operate.
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
UNIT LOUVER
2
Every pushing
button, the unit numbers
in the group control are successively dis-
played.
2
• The unit No. displayed at the first time indicates
the master unit address.
<Operation procedure>
END
1 2 3
• Fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only
operate.
TEST
3
Push
button to finish the procedure.
All the indoor units in the group control stop.
– 140 –
<Maintenance/Check list>
Aiming in environmental preservation, it is strictly recommended to clean and maintain the indoor/outdoor units
of the operating air conditioning system regularly to secure effective operation of the air conditioner.
It is also recommended to maintain the units once a year regularly when operating the air conditioner for a long
time.
Check periodically signs of rust or scratches, etc. on coating of the outdoor units.
Repair the defective position or apply the rust resisting paint if necessary.
If an indoor unit operates for approx. 8 hours or more per day, usually it is necessary to clean the indoor/outdoor
units once three months at least.
These cleaning and maintenance should be carried out by a qualified dealer.
Although the customer has to pay the charge for the maintenance, the life of the unit can be prolonged.
Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will cause shortage of capacity, freezing, water leakage or
trouble on the compressor.
Object
Part name
Contents of check
Contents of maintenance
Indoor
¡
Outdoor
¡
Heat exchanger
Fan motor
• Blocking with dust, damage check
• Audibility for sound
• Clean it when blocking is found.
• When abnormal sound is heard
¡
¡
• Clean with water if dirty
• Replace if any breakage
—
Filter
• Visual check for dirt and breakage
¡
¡
¡
• Visual check for swing and balance
• Replace fan when swinging or
balance is remarkably poor.
• Check adhesion of dust and external
appearance.
Fan
¡
• If a large dust adheres, clean it with
brush or water.
Suction/
Discharge grille
• Repair or replace it if deformation or
damage is found.
—
• Visual check for dirt and scratch
• Check blocking by dust and dirt of drain
water.
—
—
Drain pan
• Clean drain pan, Inclination check
• Cleaning/Coating with repair painting
¡
¡
—
Face panel, Louver
• Check dirt and scratch.
• Check rust and pealing of insulator
External appearance
• Coating with repair painting
¡
• Check pealing and floating of coating film
– 141 –
14. DETACHMENTS
14-1. Indoor Unit
14-1-1. Slim DuctType
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
REQUIREMENT
Be sure to put on gloves at working; otherwise an injury may be caused by parts, etc.
• Before replacement of the parts, be sure to stop operation of the air conditioner and turn off
switch of the breaker.
Air Filter
1. Detachment
1
[In case of sucking system from rear side]
1) Push knobs (3 positions) of the air filter hooks
Air filter
toward the arrow direction to remove the air
filter.
Push
2. Attachment
1) Insert the air filter surely into the hooking
grooves (4 positions) at the opposite side of the
hooks, and then fix it to the original position.
Hook
NOTE)
In case of sucking system from bottom side,
installation direction is determined. Install the air
filter so that hooks are aligned at discharge side.
[In case of sucking system from bottom side]
Air filter
Push
Hook
Plate inlet-A 1. Detachment
2
[In case of sucking system from rear side]
Plate inlet-B
1) Take off fixing screws while holding the plate
Plate inlet-B: 6 screws
inlet-A with hands to remove it.
(Sucking system from rear side: Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs)
(Sucking system from bottom side:
Ø4 × 10, 11 pcs)
2) Take off fixing screws while holding the plate
inlet-B with hands to remove it.
(Ø4 × 10, 6 pcs)
Plate inlet-A: 8 screws
NOTE)
Be careful that sheeting metal does not fall when
removing the plate inlet.
[In case of sucking system from bottom side]
Plate inlet-A: 11 screws
2. Attachment
1) Using the screws taken off in procedure 1. 2) of
2
, attach the plate inlets in order of B
→ A while holding them not to fall down.
Plate inlet-B: 6 screws
– 142 –
No. Part name
E-cover
Procedure
Remarks
1. Detachment
3
2
1) Perform work 1. of
.
2) Take off screws fixing E-cover, and then
remove hooks of the hooking part by lifting up.
(Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
2. Attachment
1) Hang on E-cover to hooks of the hooking part
so that it does not fall down.
E-cover
NOTE)
Be sure not to catch TA sensor in the E-cover;
otherwise the equipment cannot operate correctly.
2) Using the screws taken off in procedure 1. 2) of
3
, attach E-cover while holding it with hands
without clearance.
2 screws
Hooking part
NOTE)
TA sensor
If there is clearance, dust may enter in the electric
parts box.
E-cover
E-box
1. Detachment
4
Clamp
Clamp
2
3
1) Perform works 1. of
and 1. of
.
2) Remove clamps and tie wrap at upper part of
the photo. (Drain pump incorporated model: 3
positions)
Tie wrap
(Natural drain model: 2 positions)
3) Take off screws fixing E-box. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
E-box does not fall down under condition that
screws are taken off.
4) Remove the E-box over sheeting metal which
was fixed with screws.
2. Attachment
1) Insert hooks of E-box into the hooking part of
the main body.
Drain pump
Lead wire:
2 screws
2) Store E-box as before, and then attach it by
For only drain pump incorporated model
4
using screws taken off in procedure 1. 3) of
.
NOTE)
Be sure to fix surely as before the lead wires of
which clamps and tie wrap were taken off.
NOTE)
Check that lead wires of the drain pump do not
reach the fan so that they are not caught in the
fan, and then fix them.
(In case of drain pump incorporated model)
– 143 –
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
P.C. board
assembly
1. Detachment
5
P.C. board assembly
2
3
4
1) Perform works 1. of
, 1. of
, and 1. of
.
2) Disconnect connectors which are connected
from P.C. board assembly to other parts.
NOTE)
Unlock the lock of the housing to disconnect the
connectors.
CN41 : Remote controller terminal (2P: Blue)
Remote controller terminal block: 2P
CN67 : Power supply terminal (3P: Black)
CN101 : TC sensor (2P: Black)
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P: Red)
CN333 : Fan motor power supply (5P: White)
Terminal block
CN334 : Detection of fan motor position (3P: White)
(In case of drain pump incorporated model)
CN34 : Float SW (3P: Red)
CN504 : Drain pump lead (2P: White)
3) Unlock the lock of the card edge spacer, and then remove P.C. board assembly.
2. Attachment
1) Attach P.C. board assembly to the card edge spacer.
2) Using wires connect connectors as before, which were disconnected in
5
procedure 1. 2) of
.
NOTE)
Check there is no missing or poor contact of the connectors.
Multi blade fan case, 1. Detachment
6
fan lower case,
2
1) Perform work 1. of
.
Hanging hook
fan upper case
2) Take off hanging hooks at both sides of the
lower fan case to remove fan lower case.
3) Remove the upper fan case while taking off
hooks of fan upper case which are hooked to
the partition board.
4) Loosen hexagonal hole screw of the multi
blade fan to remove multi blade fan from the
shaft. If necessary, remove multi blade fan
and then remove fan upper case.
Fan lower case
2. Attachment
1) Determine the position so that multi blade fan
positions at the center of the fan upper case,
and then fix it with hexagonal hole screw.
Multi blade fan
NOTE)
Arrange the multi blade fan so that screws
position at the right side against the drain pan
assembly.
NOTE)
Fix multi blade fan with torque wrench 4.9 N•m
or more.
Drain pan
assembly side
2) Hook the lower fan case as before and attach
it with hooks.
NOTE)
Arrange the multi blade fan so that
screws position at the right side
against the drain pan assembly.
Finally check whether the multi blade fan turns
surely and smoothly or not.
– 144 –
No. Part name
Fan motor
Procedure
Remarks
1. Detachment
7
2
3
6
1) Perform works 1. of
, 1. of
, and 1. of
.
2) Remove lead wires which are connected to the
following connectors of P.C. board assembly.
NOTE)
Unlock locks of the housing, and then remove the
connectors.
CN333 : Fan motor power supply (5P: White)
CN334 : Detection of fan motor (3P: White)
Remove tie wrap which fixes lead wires.
3) Remove the noise filter from lead wire to detect fan
motor position.
4) Take off screws of fan motor fixing bracket.
Earth wires of the motor are tightened together.
(Ø5 × 10, 2 pcs)
Remove tie wrap which fixes the lead wires.
5) Remove fixing bracket of the fan motor by holding it
with hands so that the fan motor does not fall down.
Earth lead
2. Attachment
1) Mount the fan motor as before in order, Fan motor
→ Fixing bracket of fan motor → Noise filter → Lead wire process → E-cover.
NOTE)
Check there is no missing or poor contact of the connectors. Check also that the multi blade fan
turns surely and smoothly, and check together-tightening of motor earth.
Under panel 1. Detachment
8
Drain cap or drain hose
Drain pan
1) Take off the drain cap and drain the drain water
assembly
accumulated in the drain pan assembly.
In case of natural drain model, drain the drain water
by taking off hose band and drain hose.
NOTE)
When taking off drain cap and drain hose, be sure
receive drain water in a bucket, etc.
2) Take off screws fixing the under panel while holding it
to remove. (Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs)
Underr panel
NOTE)
Be careful that sheeting metal does not fall when
removing the under panel.
3) Pull out the drain pan assy. by holding handle at lower
part.
NOTE)
When pulling out the drain pan assy, never pull out the
drain socket by drawing it with hands. If doing so, water
leak may be caused.
Drain pann asseembly
4) Pull out it to some extent, lay hand on the bump at
suction side, and then remove the drain pan assembly.
NO GOOD
2. Attachment
Never hold and pull
the drain socket.
1) Hook and attach the drain pan assy. to the flange at
discharge side, and then push in.
8
2) Using screws taken off in procedure 1. 2) of
attach under panel by holding with hands.
,
3) Attach drain cap, hose band, and drain hose as
before, which were taken off in procedure 1. 1) of
8
.
NOTE)
Finally, be sure to check there is no water leakage from
each attached part.
– 145 –
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Drain pump, 1. Detachment
9
Float switch,
Drain hose
2
3
1) Perform works in procedures 1. of
, 1. of
,
Drain hose
8
1. of
.
Hose band
2) Disconnect lead wires which are connected to
the following connectors of P.C. board assembly.
Drain pump
NOTE)
Unlock locks of the housing to remove the
connectors.
CN34 : float SW (3P: Red)
CN504 : Drain pump lead (2P: White)
3) Loosen hose band, remove cap of the drain
hose, and take off screws while holding drain
pump. Remove them with care that pipes are
not damaged. (Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs)
4) Take off screws while holding metal on float
switch.
Float switch
Remove them with care so that pipes are not
damaged. (Ø4 × 10, 1 pc)
NOTE)
If the pipes are damaged, refrigerant leak may be caused. Take out them with great care.
2. Attachment
9
1) Attach ASSY sheeting metal which was removed in procedure 1. 3) of
pipes are not damaged, and then fix it with screws.
with care that
2) Insert the drain hose into the inlet of drain pump, and then fix it with hose band. Arrange
handle of the hose band at contrary side of heat exchanger side and at direction remote from
drain pan assembly.
8
3) Carry out wiring as before, and then perform work of procedure 2. of
.
NOTE)
Finally check whether they correctly operate or not.
Evaporator
assembly
1. Detachment
10
1) Recover refrigerant, and then remove refriger-
ant pipes at indoor unit side.
2
3
2) Perform works of procedures 1. of
, 1. of
, 1.
8
of
.
Remove sensors.
3) Take off screws of the pipe holder, and remove
the pipe holder. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
4) Take off screws of the heat exchanger support
board (Pipe side), and remove the heat
exchanger support board
(Pipe side). (Ø4 × 10, 4 pcs)
Pipe holder
5) Take off screws of the heat exchanger support
board (Opposite side) which fixes terminal
block of the evaporator assembly.
(Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
Heat exchanger support board
(Pipe side)
6) Remove the evaporator assembly.
2. Attachment
1) Fasten the parts as before in order, Evaporator
assembly → Pipe holder → Set sensors
→ Drain pan assembly → Under panel.
2) Connect the refrigerant pipe as before, and
then perform vacuuming.
– 146 –
14-2. Outdoor Unit
14-2-1. RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Common
1
procedure
CAUTION
Valve
cover
Never forget to put on the gloves at working
time, otherwise an injury will be caused by
the parts, etc.
1. Detachment
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner, and
turn off the main switch of the breaker for
air conditioner.
2) Remove the valve cover.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 1 pc.)
• After removing screw, remove the valve
cover pulling it downward.
Wiring
cover
3) Remove wiring cover
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.), and then remove
connecting cable.
4) Remove the upper cabinet.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 5 pcs.)
• After taking off screws, remove the
upper cabinet pulling it upward.
2. Attachment
Upper cabinet
1) Attach the waterproof cover.
CAUTION
Be sure to attach a waterproof cover.
If it is not attached, there is a possibility that
water enters inside of the outdoor unit.
Water-proof
cover
Cord clamp
2) Attach the upper cabinet.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 5 pcs.)
• Hook the rear side of the upper cabinet
to claw of the rear cabinet, and then put
it on the front cabinet.
Rear cabinet
3) Perform cabling of connecting cables, and
fix with cord clamp.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L 3 pcs.)
4) Attach the wiring cover.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)
5) Attach the valve cover.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 1 pc.)
Claw
• Insert the upper part of the upper
cabinet, set hooking claw of the valve
cover to the slit (at three positions) of
the main body, and then attach it
pushing upward.
– 147 –
No. Part name
Front cabinet 1. Detachment
Procedure
Remarks
2
Motor support
1
1) Perform work of item 1 of
.
2) Remove screws (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.) of
the front cabinet and the inverter cover.
3) Take off screws of the front cabinet and
the bottom plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8L 3 pcs.)
4) Take off screws of the front cabinet and
the motor support.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)
• The left side of the front side if made to
insert to the rear cabinet, so remove it
pulling upward.
For single-phase type models,
also take off this screw
Front cabinet
3. Attachment
Front cabinet (Left side)
1) Insert hook at the left side of the front side
into the rear cabinet.
2) Hook the lower part at the right side of the
front to concavity of the bottom plate.
Insert the hook of the rear cabinet into the
slit of the front cabinet.
Slit
Claw
3) Attach the removed screws to the original
positions.
Slit
Hook
Cord clamp
Front cabinet
Concavity at
bottom plate
Lower
slit
– 148 –
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Inverter
assembly
1. Detachment
3
Screws
1
1) Perform work of item 1 of
.
2) Take off screws of the upper part of the front
cabinet.
• If removing the inverter cover under this
condition, P.C. board can be checked.
Front cabinet
• If there is no space in the upper part of the
2
upper cabinet, perform work of
.
Inverter cover
CAUTION
Be careful to check the inverter because high-
voltage circuit is incorporated in it.
3) Perform discharging by connecting
,
–
+
polarities by discharging resistance (approx.
100Ω, 40W) or plug of soldering iron to
,
+
–
terminals of the C14 (printed as “CAU-
TION HIGH VOLTAGE”) electrolytic capaci-
tor (500µF) of P.C. board.
Cord clamp
WARNING
The electrolytic capacitor may not normally
discharge according to error contents and the
voltage may remain. Therefore, be sure to
discharge the capacitor.
Screws
WARNING
Plug of
soldering iron
For discharging, never use a screwdriver and
Discharging
position
others for short-circuiting between
and
–
+
(Discharging
period
electrodes. As the electrolytic capacitor is one
with a large capacity, it is very dangerous
because a large electric spark will occur.
10 seconds
or more)
4) Take off screws (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)
fixing the main body and the inverter box.
Inverter
assembly
5) Remove various lead wires from the holder
at upper part of the inverter box and wiring
holder at right side of the terminal block.
6) Remove the lead wire from the bundled part
at left side of the terminal block.
7) Pull the inverter box upward.
8) Disconnect connectors of various lead
wires.
REQUIREMENT
As each connector has a lock mechanism,
avoid to remove the connector by holding the
lead wire, but by holding the connector.
Remove the connectors
with locking function by
pushing the part indicated
by the arrow mark.
– 149 –
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Control P.C.
board assembly
1) Disconnect lead wires and connectors
connected from the control P.C. board
assembly to other parts.
4
1. Lead wires
Take off
earth screws.
• Connection with the power terminal
block: 3 wires (Black, White, Orange)
• Earth wire: 1 wire (Black)
2. Connectors
Power line
• Connection with compressor:
Remove 3P connector.
• Connection with reactor:
Inverter box
(Metal sheet)
Remove the relay connectors from
P08, 11 (2P, White) and P30, 31
(2P, Yellow)
Control P.C.
board assembly
P.C. board base
CN300 : Outdoor fan (3P, White)
CN701 : 4-way valve (3P, Yellow)
CN600 : TE sensor (2P, White)
CN601 : TD sensor (3P, White)
CN603 : TS sensor (3P, White)
CN602 : TO sensor (3P, White)
CN500 : Case thermo. (2P, White)
CN700 : PMV (6P, White)
Hooking claws
(4 positions)
2) Remove the inverter box (Metal plate).
3) Remove the control board assembly
from P.C. board base.
(Remove the heat sink and the control
board assembly as they are screwed.)
Control P.C.
board assembly
NOTES:
1. CN300 and CN701, etc. at the control
board assembly side are connectors with
locking function.
P.C. board base
Therefore, remove the connector while
pushing the part indicated by an arrow
mark.
2. Remove 4 hooking claws of P.C. board
base, and remove upward the heat sink
with hands.
4) Take off 3 screws fixing the heat sink
and main control board assembly side,
and replace the board with a new one.
NOTE:
Heat sink
Inverter box
(Metal sheet)
When mounting a new board, check that the
board is correctly set in the groove of the
base holder of P.C. board base.
Attach the P.C. board so that the heat sink
comes securely contact with the metal sheet.
– 150 –
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
1
2
3
Rear cabinet 1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
,
.
5
2) Take off fixed screws for the bottom plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 3 pcs.)
3) Take off fixed screws for the heat exchanger.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)
Rear cabinet
4) Take off fixed screw for the valve mounting
plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 1 pc.)
1
2
Fan motor
1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
.
6
2) Take off the flange nut fixing the fan motor
and the propeller.
Flange nut
• Turning it clockwise, the flange nut can be
loosened. (To tighten the flange nut, turn
counterclockwise.)
3) Remove the propeller fan.
4) Disconnect the connector for fan motor from
the inverter.
5) Take off the fixing screws (2 pcs.) holding by
hands so that the fan motor does not fall.
Loosen the nut by
turning clockwise
NOTE:
Tighten the flange nut with torque 4.9Nm
(50kgf/cm).
Propeller fan
Fan
motor
– 151 –
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
1
2
Compressor 1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
,
7
3
4
5
,
,
.
Partition plate
2) Discharge refrigerant gas.
3) Remove the partition plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 3 pcs.)
4) Remove the noise-insulator.
5) Remove the terminal covers of the
compressor, and disconnect lead wires
of the compressor and the compressor
thermo assembly from the terminal.
6) Remove pipes connected to the
compressor with a burner.
Compressor
lead
CAUTION
Pay attention to that flame does not
involve 4-way valve or PMV. (If doing
so, a malfunction may be caused.)
Case thermo
7) Take off the fixing screws of the bottom
plate and heat exchanger.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L)
Heat exchanger
8) Take off the fixing screws of the valve
clamping plate to the bottom plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 2 pcs.)
Remove
(Discharge pipe)
9) Pull upward he refrigerating cycle.
Remove
(Suction pipe)
Screw
10) Take off nut fixing the compressor to
the bottom place.
Valve
support board
Screws (2 pcs.)
CAUTION
Compressor bolt (3 pcs.)
When reconnecting the lead wires to
the compressor terminals after
replacement of the compressor, be
sure to caulk the Faston terminal
without loosening.
1
3
Reactor
1) Perform works of item 1 of
2) First take off two screws
and
.
8
Partition
plate
Reactor
support board
Reactor
(ST1T Ø4 × 8L) of the reactor fixed to
the reactor support.
3) Remove the reactor support from the
partition plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8L, 4 pcs.)
4) Take off two screws (ST1T Ø4 × 8L)
directly attached to the partition plate.
– 152 –
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Pulse Motor Valve 1. Detachment
9
(PMV) coil
1
2
1) Perform works of items
and
.
2) Release the coil from the concavity by
turning it, and remove coil from the PMV.
2. Attachment
1) Put the coil deep into the bottom posi-
tion.
2) Fix the coil firmly by turning it to the
concavity.
PMV coil
Fan guard
1. Detachment
10
Minus screwdriver
1
2
1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
.
2) Remove the front cabinet, and put it
down so that fan guard side directs
downward.
CAUTION
Perform works on a corrugated cardboard,
cloth, etc. to prevent flaw on the product.
3) Remove the hooking claws by pushing
with minus screwdriver along with the
arrow mark in the right figure, and
remove the fan guard.
Front cabinet
Hooking claw
Front cabinet
2. Attachment
1) Insert claws of the fan guard in the hole
of the front cabinet. Push the hooking
claws (10 positions) with hands and then
fix the claws.
CAUTION
All the attaching works have completed.
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed
to the specified positions.
Fan guard
– 153 –
14-2-2. RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Common
procedure
1
Front panel
CAUTION
Be sure to put on the gloves at working time;
otherwise an injury may be caused by a part,
etc.
1. Detachment
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner and then
turn off switch of the breaker.
2) Remove the front panel.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
∗ After removing screws, remove the front
panel while pulling it downward.
3) Remove the power wire and indoor/outdoor
connecting wire from the cord clamp and the
terminals.
Top plate
4) Remove the top plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)
2. Attachment
1) Attach the top plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)
In this time, insert the fin guard of rear side
between the top plate and the heat exchanger
(Rear side).
2) Connect the power supply wire and the
indoor/outdoor connecting wire to the terminal
and fix it with cord clamp.
Insert the fin guard of rear side between
the top plate and the heat exchanger
(at rear side).
CAUTION
Using bundling band on the market, be sure to
fix the power wire and indoor/outdoor
connecting wire along the crossover pipe so that
they do not come to contact with the
compressor, valve at gas side, pipe at gas side
and discharge pipe.
3) Attach the front panel.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
– 154 –
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Discharge
port cabinet
1. Detachment
2
Heat exchanger
Discharge port cabinet
1
1) Carry out work of 1 of
.
Motor base Partition plate
2) Remove screws for the discharge port cabinet
and the partition plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 3 pcs.)
3) Remove screws for the discharge port cabinet
and the bottom plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
4) Remove screws of the discharge port cabinet
and the motor base. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)
5) Remove screws of the discharge port cabinet
and the heat exchanger.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)
6) Remove screws of the discharge port cabinet
and the fin guard.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
Fin guard
1
Side cabinet 1) Carry out work of 1 of
.
3
Inverter assembly
Side cabinet
2) Remove screws which fix the inverter assembly
and the side cabinet. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)
3) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the valve
fixing plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)
4) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the pipe
panel (Rear).
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
5) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the
bottom plate. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)
6) Remove screws of the side cabinet and the heat
exchanger. (Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)
7) Slide the side cabinet upward and then remove it.
(Hook of inverter)
Valve fixing plate
Piping panel (Rear)
– 155 –
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Exchange of 1. Control P.C. board
electric parts
4
Compressor lead
1
1) Carry out work of 1 of
.
Relay connector:
2 positions
Control
P.C. board
(1 at rear side)
WARNING
Fan motor
Bundling band
(Reactor lead)
Never disassemble the inverter for 1 minute
after power has been turned off because an
electric shock may be caused.
2) Remove the connectors connected to the
control P.C. board.
(Indoor power supply, temperature sensors,
PMV coil, 4-way valve coil, compressor case
thermo, fan motor)
Compressor
case thhermo
∗ Unlock the lock of the housing part and
then remove the connectors.
Temperaature
sensor
Reactor lead wires
(White,Charcoal gray)
3) Remove the lead wires connected to the
control P.C. board.
(Torque at tightening time: 1.47 ± 0.1N•m)
Compressor lead
Earth wire
U: CN200
V: CN201
W: CN202 Black
Red
White
4-way valvve coil
PMV coil
Indoor power supply
Reactor lead
Screw for fixing P.C. board
Relay connector: 2 positions
Remove the power wire from the power
supply terminal block.
(Torque at tightening time: 2.5 ± 0.1N•m)
4) Remove the earth wire from the control P.C.
board. (Truss B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 1 pc.)
5) Remove the fixing screws of the control P.C.
board.
Screw for fixing element (7 positions)
Power suppply teerrminall block
(Screw with collar for fixing element Ø3 × 16,
7 pcs. Pan S tight screw for fixing P.C. board
Ø3 × 20, 1 pc.)
6) Remove the control P.C. board.
(Supporter: 5 positions)
NOTE:
It is difficult to take out it because of radiator
grease for heat sink.
7) Mount a new control P.C. board.
NOTE:
Control P.C. board Insulating sheet (Q300)
Aluminum plate (Q201)
Do not forget to attach the aluminum plate (Q201)
and the insulating sheet (Q300).
(Applying a little of radiator grease at the rear
surface of the insulating sheet in advance to
adhere to the heat sink makes easy the work.)
Radiator
grease
– 156 –
No. Part name
Exchange of 1. Reactor
Procedure
Remarks
4
Reactor relay connector
(Connected to lead wire
(White) at P.C. board side)
electric parts
(Continued)
1
3
1) Carry out works of 1 of
and
.
2) Remove the relay connector connected to
the control P.C. board.
3) Cut off the bundling band binding the
compressor lead and the relay connector.
4) Remove each reactor.
(Truss B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 2 pcs. each)
5) Attach a new reactor.
NOTE:
Be sure to bind the removed bundling band with
the bundling band on the market.
Be careful that the fan motor lead does not come
to contact with the reactor body.
Reactor relay connector
(Connected to lead wire
(Charcoal gray) at P.C. board side)
Fan motor lead
Bundling band
(Compressor lead, reactor lead)
Upper reactor
Connected to reactor relay connector
(Connected to lead wire (White)
at P.C. board side)
Bundling band
Lower reactor
Connected to reactor relay connector
(Connected to lead wire (Charcoal gray)
at P.C. board side)
– 157 –
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
1
2
Fan motor 1) Carry out works of 1 of
and
.
5
Propeller fan
Loosened by
turning clockwise
2) Remove the flange nut fixing the fan motor and the
propeller fan.
∗ The flange nut is loosened by turning clockwise.
(To tighten it, turn it counterclockwise.)
3) Remove the propeller fan.
4) Remove the connector for fan motor from the
inverter.
5) Remove the fan motor lead from the fan motor
lead fixing rubber of the penetrated part of the
partition plate.
Flange nut
Propeller fan
6) Remove the fixing screws (4 pcs. each) while
supporting the fan motor so that it does not fall.
✻ Cautions when assembling the fan motor
∗ Tighten the flange nut with 4.95N•m
(50kgf.cm).
∗ Adjust length on the fan motor lead fixing
rubber so that the fan motor lead does not
slacken in order not to put the fan motor lead
into contact with the propeller fan.
Attach the fan motor lead fixing rubber to the
partition plate so that projection directs to the
refrigerating cycle side.
Fan motor
Fan motor connector
∗ Be sure that the rector body does not come to
contact with the fan motor lead.
∗ Be sure to bind the removed bundling band
with the bundling band on the market.
CAUTION
Use the metal band of the motor base to fix the
fan motor lead on the motor base so that the fan
motor lead does not come to contact with the
propeller fan.
Inverter
Fan motor lead fixing rubber
Projection/Refrigerating cycle side
Fan motor
– 158 –
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Compressor
Compressor lead
1. Removal of broken compressor
6
Piping pannel (Rear)
1) Recover the refrigerant gas.
1
2
3
2) Carry out works of 1 of
and
,
.
3) Remove the piping panel (Front).
Remove screws of the piping panel
(Front) and the bottom plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
Pipingg paneel (Front)
Remove screws of the piping panel
(Front) and the piping panel (Rear).
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)
Bundlinng band
for heat proof
Pipe cover
4) Remove the piping panel (Rear).
TD sensor
Remove screws of the piping panel
(Rear) and the bottom plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
5) Remove the valve fixing plate.
Remove bolts of the valve.
(Hexagonal screw Ø6 × 15, 4 pcs.)
Compressor
lead
Remove screws of the valve fixing plate
and the partition plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)
Comprressor
case tthermo
Remove screws of the valve fixing plate
and the accumulator.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)
TS sensor
Pipe coover,
bundlinng band
Cut off the bundling band for the dis-
charge pipe and the suction pipe and
then remove each sensor and coil lead
of PMV.
6) Remove the sound insulating plate.
(Upper side, outer winding, inner winding)
Suction pipe
Accumulator
Discharge pipe
7) Remove terminal cover from the
compressor and then remove the
compressor lead and also the
compressor case thermo.
8) Remove TD sensor fixed to the
discharge pipe.
Pipe cover, bundling band,
9) Remove the compressor lead.
(Leave the ferrite core attached to the
electric parts box as it is.)
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TD, TTSS sseennssoorrss))
PMV coil lead
Black pipe cover for heat proof,
bundling band for heat proof,
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TD, TS sensors)
PMV coil lead
Control P.C. board
U : CN200
V : CN201
W : CN202
Red
White
Black
Control
P.C. board
(Tightening torque: 1.47 ± 0.1N•m)
Comprressor
lead
Compressor lead
Ferrite core
– 159 –
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Compressor
Compressor lead
(Continued)
10) Using a burner, remove the discharge
pipe and the suction pipe connected to
the compressor.
6
Remove
(Discharge pipe)
Remove
(Suction pipe)
WARNING
In case of removing the piping by broiling
the welded part with a burner, if the piping
includes oil, it may burst into flames at the
moment when wax melted, so take
sufficient care.
CAUTION
Note so that the flame does not catch the
4-way valve and PMV.
(An operation may become an error.)
11) Pull off the discharge pipe and the
suction pipe of the refrigerating cycle
upward.
Compressor bolt
(3 pcs.)
12) Remove the compressor bolts which fix
the compressor to the bottom plate.
(3 pcs.)
13) Pull out the compressor toward you.
X
CAUTIONX
The weight of the compressor is 15kg or
more, so handle it by 2 workers.
– 160 –
Compressor lead
i
n
d
h
e
f
e
r
r
itte
c
o
r
e
W
t
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Compressor
Compressor lead
(Continued)
2. Mounting of compressor
6
1) Mount the compressor in the reverse
procedure of removal.
with the commpressor
lead wire by 4 times.
NOTES:
Ferrite core
∗ After exchange of the compressor, be sure to
exchange the compressor lead. (Repair part
code of compressor lead: 43160591)
0 to 50
(Positiooning
standard of
compreessor
lead wire)
In this time, wrap the ferrite core with the
compressor lead wire by 4 times.
Using bundling band on the market, bind the
compressor lead. As the compressor lead is
long, be sure that the compressor lead does
not contact with the discharge pipe.
Using the bundling band on the market,
fix the bundle at 2 positions.
Pass the soundproof platee (outer wwinding)
through betwween the ssuctionn ppipe and
the accumulator.
∗ Fix the removed each sensor and PMV coil
lead wire to the discharge pipe and the
suction pipe with the bundling band via the
pipe cover.
Suctioon pipe
Accumulator
In this time, take note that each sensor and
PMV coil lead wire do not come to contact
with the discharge pipe and the reactor.
(For fixing to the discharge pipe, use the
black heat-proof pipe cover and the bundling
band for heat-proof which is sold on the
market.)
Discharrge pipe
Headeer pipe
∗ As shown in the right figure, mount the
soundproof plate (inner winding, outer
winding) by inserting between the compres-
sor and the piping, and between piping and
the partition plate.
Pass the soundproof plate
(inner windinng) thrrough
betweeen commppressoor and
discharrge pipee, suctiion pipe
and thenn put itt on thee other
side att thiss pposition.
∗ Put the compressor lead wire and the
compressor case thermo between inner
winding and outer winding of the soundproof
as if dropping them in.
Put the soundproof plate
(outer winding) on the
other side at this position.
Soundproof plate
(upper)
Pipe cover, bundling band, TS sensor
Discharrge pipe
Soundproof plate
(outer wwinding)
Do not make clearance between
the soundproof plate (upper) and
the soundproof plate (outer winding).
Black heat-proof pipe cover and
heat-proof bundling band,
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TD, TS sensor)
PMV coil lead wire
Set each sensor so that it does not
come to contact with the discharge pipe.
Suction pipe
PMV coil lead
Pipe cover, bundling band,
each sensor (TL, TO, TE, TS sensor)
PMV coil lead
– 161 –
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Compressor
3. Vacuuming
6
Compressor lead
(Continued)
1) Connect the vacuum pump to the charge
port of the gas pipe valve and then drive
the vacuum pump.
2) Carry out vacuuming until the vacuum
low pressure gauge indicates 1 (mmHg).
NOTE:
Before vacuuming, open PMV fully. If PMV is
closed, vacuuming may be impossible between
the liquid pipe valve and PMV of the outdoor unit.
SW804
SW801
Forced full-opening method of PMV
∗ Turn on the leakage breaker.
∗ Turn on 1 and 3 of DIP SW804 on the control
P.C. board of the outdoor unit.
∗ Keep pushing SW801 on the control P.C. board
of the outdoor unit for 1 second or more.
∗ After pushing SW801 for 1 second or more,
turn off the leakage breaker within 2 minutes.
4. Refrigerant charging
1) Add the quantity of refrigerant specified
by the pipe length into the charge port of
the valve.
PMV coil
1. Detachment
7
PMV coil
1
3
1) Carry out works of 1 of
and
.
2) While pulling the coil upward and
removing the spring which pinches the
copper pipe, remove the coil from PMV
main body.
2. Attachment
1) Match the spring to the copper pipe and
fix it.
Spring
PMV main body
– 162 –
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Fan guard
3. Detachment
8
Bell mouth
Discharge port cabinet
1
2
1) Carry out works of 1 of
and
.
CAUTION
To prevent scratching on the product, handle
the product on a cardboard or cloth.
2) Remove the discharge port cabinet and
then put on it so that the fan guard side
directs downward.
3) Remove the hooking claws (8 positions) of
the fan guard.
Fan guard
Hooking claw
2. Attachment
1) Push the hooking claws (8 positions) with
hands from the front side to fix the claws.
CAUTIONX
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed at
the specified positions.
– 163 –
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST
15-1. Indoor Unit
15-1-1. RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
220
206, 209
208
217
208
204
232
222
216
219
205
228
201
230
204
227
229
212
214
207
207
213
213, 218, 224
225, 226, 231
236
235
234
237
233
TEST
SETTING
C
ADR
– 164 –
Model Name RAV-SM
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
404SDT-E
454SDT-E
564SDT-E
201
203
205
206
207
208
211
212
213
214
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
4312C040 Motor, Fan
43120227 Fan, Multi blade
43170244 Hose, Drain
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
4314J402 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y
43122084 Case, Fan, Lower
43122085 Case, Fan, Upper
43100319 Plate, Inlet-B
43172183 Pan Ass’y, Drain
43149351 Socket
43179129 Cap, Drain
43170240 Hose, Drain
43100321 Flange
43049697 Bonnet
43179135 Band, Hose
43180327 Air Filter, ABS PP
43079249 Band, Hose
43196109 Bushing
43047685 Nut, Flare, 1/4 IN
43047688 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN
43149353 Socket, 1/2 IN
43060029 Filter, Noise
43151287 Switch, Float
43100320 Plate, Inlet-A
43177012 Pump, Drain, MDP-1401
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN
43019904 Holder, Sensor SUS
431S8088 Owner’s Manual
43166011 Remote controller, SX-A4EE
43166004 Remote controller, SX-A11JE2
43166006 Remote controller, WH-H1JE2
43166012 Remote controller, SX-A5EE
– 165 –
<E-parts assembly>
404
403
405
401
402
Model Name RAV-SM
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
404SDT-E
454SDT-E
564SDT-E
401
402
403
404
405
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, Service TC (F6)
43050426 Sensor, Service
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
43160565 Terminal, Block, 3P, AC250V, 20A
43160568 Terminal, 2P, AC30V/DC42V, 1A
4316V368 P.C. Board Ass’y, 220–240V, MCC-1570
– 166 –
15-2. Outdoor Unit
15-2-1. RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
11
29
2
16, 17
18, 19
4
31
30
12, 14
10, 26, 32
13, 15
28
33
27
6
3
21
9
8
22
25
20
30
24
7
5
1
– 167 –
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
404AT-E 404ATZ-E 404ATZG-E 454AT-E 454ATZ-E 454ATZG-E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
43105042 Cabinet, Front, RoHs
43105041 Cabinet, Upper
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43005698 Cabinet, Side, Right, RoHs
43005672 Cabinet, Side, Left
4301V035 Guard, Fan
4301V053 Guard, Fin
43100346 Base Ass’y, RoHs
43119471 Caver, Valve, Packed
43162055 Caver, Wiring Ass’y, RoHs
Compressor, DA150A1F-20,
10
43041786
RoHs
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
4314G246 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs
4314G247 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs
4314G248 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs
37546845 Valve, Packed, 6.35
43146680 Valve, Packed, 12.7
43147196 Bonnet, 1/4 IN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN
43046444 Valve, 4-WAY, STF-0108Z
Coil, Solenoid,
43146722
17
1
1
1
1
1
1
STF-01A J502E1
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
43146695 Valve, Pulse, Modulating (PMV)
37546849 Coil, PMV, CAM-MD12TF-6
43055521 Reactor
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
4302C068 Motor, Fan, ICF-140-43-4R
43020329 Fan, Propeller, PJ421
43047669 Nut, Flange
43197164 Nut, Flange, SUS304-WSB
43032441 Nipple, Drain
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43089160 Cap, Waterproof
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal
43063339 Holder, Sensor (TO)
43049749 Rubber, Cushion
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43063321 Holder, Sensor, 4-8, 9.52
43063322 Holder, Sensor, 6-11.4, 12.7
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6-6.35, 8
43063317 Holder, Thermostat
4314Q064 Muffler, 1/2
– 168 –
<Inverter assembly>
705
707
707
712
710
706
711
Model Name RAV-SP
404AT-E 404ARZ-E 404ATZG-E 454AT-E 454ATZ-E 454ATZG-E
Location
Part No.
No.
Description
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
710
711
712
43050422 Sensor, TE
43050423 Sensor, TS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43050427 Sensor, TO
43050430 Sensor, TD
43062228 Base, P.C.board
43160566 Terminal, Block 6P, 20A
4316V293 P.C. Board Ass’y, SW, MCC-1530
4316V367 P.C.board Ass’y, MCC-5009
43160571 Fuse, Holder, 250V, 15A
43160590 Fuse, AC250V, 6.3A
43158192 Reactor
– 169 –
15-2-2. RAV-SP564AT-E, RAV-SP564ATZ-E, RAV-SP564ATZG-E
– 170 –
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
564AT-E
564ATZ-E
564ATZG-E
1
43105042 Cabinet, Front
43105041 Cabinet, Upper
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
43005698 Cabinet, Side, Right
43005672 Cabinet, Side, Left
4301V088 Guard, Fan
4
5
6
4301V053 Guard, Fin
7
43100346 Base Ass’y
8
43119471 Cover, Valve, Packed
43162055 Cover, Wiring Ass’y
43041644 Compressor, DA150A1F-21F
4314Q064 Muffler
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
4314G281 Condenser Ass’y
4314G282 Condenser Ass’y
4314G283 Condenser Ass’y
37546845 Valve, Packed, 6.35
43146680 Valve, Packed, 12.7
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
43147196 Bonnet, 1/4 IN
43046445 Valve, 4-Way, STF-0213Z
43146722 Coil, Solenoid, STF-01AJ502E1
43146695 Valve, Pulse, Modulating, CAM-B30YGTF-2
43046487 Coil, PMV, CAM-MD12TF-12
43058277 Reactor, CH-57-Z-T
4302C068 Motor, Fan, ICF-140-43-4R
43020329 Fan, Propeller, PJ421
43047669 Nut, Flange
43197164 Nut, Flange
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
43032441 Nipple, Drain
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43089160 Cap, Waterproof
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal
43063339 Holder, Sensor TO
43042485 Rubber, Cushion
43063321 Holder, Sensor
43063322 Holder, Sensor
43063325 Holder, Sensor
43063317 Holder, Thermostat
43107256 Plate, Fix, Valve, Packed
4301V080 Plate, Fix, Valve, Packed
43148205 Accumulator Ass’y
43148214 Accumulator Ass’y
43039392 Base, Motor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43039394 Base, Motor
– 171 –
<Inverter assembly>
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
Part No.
No.
Description
564AT-E
564ATZ-E
564ATZG-E
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
710
711
712
43050422 Sensor, TE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43050423 Sensor, TS
43050427 Sensor, TO
43050430 Sensor, TD
43062228 Base, P.C.board
43160566 Terminal block, 6P, 20A
4316V293 P.C. board Ass’y, SW, MCC-1530
4316V384 P.C. board Ass’y, MCC-5009
43160571 Fuse, Holder, 15A, 250V
43160590 Fuse, 6.3A, 250V AC
43158192 Reactor, CH-43-Z-T
– 172 –
15-2-3. RAV-SP804AT-E, RAV-SP804ATZ-E, RAV-SP804ATZG-E
13
24
19
20
30, 31, 32
5
33
15
7, 38
23
35
28, 29
4, 26
22
34
3
17
9, 10, 36
6, 27
8, 39, 40
14
21
25, 37
16
11
18
1
2
12
– 173 –
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
804AT-E
804ATZ-E
804ATZG-E
1
43019904 Holder, Sensor
43032441 Nipple, Drain
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
43041798 Compressor, DA220A2F-22L
43046493 Coil, PMV, CAM-MD12TF-15
43046451 Valve, 4-Way, STF-0218G
43047246 Bonnet, 3/8 IN
4
5
6
7
43047669 Nut, Flange
8
43049739 Cushion, Rubber
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal
43063317 Holder, Thermostat
43100437 Panel, Front, Piping
43100438 Panel, Back, Piping
43100440 Plate, Roof
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43100452 Panel, Side
43100453 Panel, Air outlet
43100454 Panel, Flont
43100455 Base Ass’y
43107276 Hanger
43107277 Guard, Fin, Back
43107278 Guard, Fin, Side
43109422 Guard, Fan
43120224 Fan, propeller, PB521
43122113 Bell mouth
4312C042 Motor, Fan, ICF-280-A60-1
43146686 Valve, Packed, 9.52
43146695 Valve, Pulse, Modulating, CAM-B30YGTF-2
43146724 Valve, Ball, SBV-JA5GTC-1
43148232 Accumulator, Ass’y, 1.8L
43148233 Accumulator, Ass’y, 1.8L
4314G278 Condenser Ass’y
4314G279 Condenser Ass’y
4314G280 Condenser Ass’y
4314N024 Coil, Valve, 4-Way, VHV-01AP552B1
4314Q031 Strainer, DIA 9.52
4314Q056 Strainer, DIA 25.4
43160591 Lead Ass’y, compressor
43194029 Bonnet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43197164 Nut, Flange
43197183 Bolt, Compressor
43197184 Bolt, Compressor
3
3
3
– 174 –
<Inverter assembly>
709, 710
711
704
707
706
708
705
1 2 3
703
702
701
712
713
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
Part No.
No.
Description
804AT-E
804ATZ-E
804ATZG-E
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, Ø6
43063325 Holder, Sensor (TE)
43150319 Sensor Ass’y, Ø4
43155188 Reactor, CH-56-2Z-T
43160565 Terminal block, 3P, 20A
43160581 Termonal,3P, 60A
43160589 Fuse, 10A, 250V AC
43163055 Holder, Sensor (TO)
43163059 Spacer, Bush
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43163060 Spacer, Collar
4316V387 P.C.board Ass’y, MCC-1571
43063322 Holder, Sensor (TS)
43063321 Holder, Sensor (TD)
– 175 –
WARNINGS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE
Important
Check of Concentration Limit
The room in which the air conditioner is to be
installed requires a design that in the event of
refrigerant gas leaking out, its concentration will
not exceed a set limit.
NOTE 2 :
The standards for minimum room volume are as follows.
1) No partition (shaded portion)
The refrigerant R410A which is used in the air
conditioner is safe, without the toxicity or combustibility of
ammonia, and is not restricted by laws to be imposed
which protect the ozone layer. However, since it contains
more than air, it poses the risk of suffocation if its
concentration should rise excessively. Suffocation from
leakage of R410A is almost non-existent. With the recent
increase in the number of high concentration buildings,
however, the installation of multi air conditioner systems
is on the increase because of the need for effective use
of floor space, individual control, energy conservation by
curtailing heat and carrying power etc.
Most importantly, the multi air conditioner system is able
to replenish a large amount of refrigerant compared with
conventional individual air conditioners. If a single unit of
the multi conditioner system is to be installed in a small
room, select a suitable model and installation procedure
so that if the refrigerant accidentally leaks out, its
concentration does not reach the limit (and in the event
of an emergency, measures can be made before injury
can occur).
2) When there is an effective opening with the adjacent
room for ventilation of leaking refrigerant gas (opening
without a door, or an opening 0.15% or larger than the
respective floor spaces at the top or bottom of the door).
Outdoor unit
Refrigerant piping
Indoor unit
3) If an indoor unit is installed in each partitioned room
and the refrigerant piping is interconnected, the
smallest room of course becomes the object.
In a room where the concentration may exceed the limit,
create an opening with adjacent rooms, or install
mechanical ventilation combined with a gas leak
detection device.
But when a mechanical ventilation is installed
interlocked with a gas leakage detector in the smallest
room where the density limit is exceeded, the volume
of the next smallest room becomes the object.
The concentration is as given below.
Total amount of refrigerant (kg)
Min. volume of the indoor unit installed room (m³)
≤ Concentration limit (kg/m³)
Refrigerant piping
Outdoor unit
The concentration limit of R410A which is used in multi
air conditioners is 0.3kg/m³.
Very
small
Indoor unit
room
Small
room
Medium
room
Large room
Mechanical ventilation device - Gas leak detector
NOTE 1 :
If there are 2 or more refrigerating systems in a single
refrigerating device, the amounts of refrigerant should be
as charged in each independent device.
NOTE 3 :
The minimum indoor floor area compared with the
amount of refrigerant is roughly as follows:
(When the ceiling is 2.7m high)
Outdoor unit
e.g., charged
e.g.,
amount (10kg)
charged amount (15kg)
40
Range below the
35
m²
density limit
of 0.3 kg/m³
30
25
20
15
10
5
(countermeasures
not needed)
Room A Room B Room C Room D Room E Room F
Indoor unit
Range above
the density limit
of 0.3 kg/m³
(countermeasures
needed)
For the amount of charge in this example:
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in
rooms A, B and C is 10kg.
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in
rooms D, E and F is 15kg.
0
10
20
30
Total amount of refrigerant
kg
TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION
23-17, TAKANAWA 3 CHOME, MINATOKU, TOKYO, 108-8580, JAPAN
Copyright © 2008 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.
|